User interfaces integrating hardware buttons

Abstract

User interfaces integrating variable hardware inputs are described, including user interfaces that perform different operations in response to presses of different intensities with and without movement, user interfaces that perform different media capture operations based on presses of different lengths with and without movement, user interfaces with controls that can be customized by swiping near a hardware control, user interfaces for media playback with dynamic speed adjustments, and user interfaces that perform adjustments before and after contact with a hardware control ends.

Description

Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 APPENDIX

[0001] The following is a description of a method for controlling a computer system based on variable characteristics of hardware inputs, in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, and / or 600) that is in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a display controller; a touch- sensitive display system; a display (e.g., integrated and / or connected), a 3D display, a transparent display, a projector, and / or a heads-up display) and a first input device (e.g., including one or more hardware buttons and / or surfaces, such as mechanical (e.g., physically depressible), solid-state, intensity-sensitive, and / or touch-sensitive (e.g., capacitive) buttons and / or surfaces), e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6A-6B. In some embodiments, the first input device is included in a plurality of input devices in communication with the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system is optionally in communication with one or more cameras, such as a rear (user-facing) camera and a forward (environment-facing) camera and / or a plurality of cameras with different lenses, such as a standard camera, a telephoto camera, and / or a wide-angle camera. In some embodiments, the computer system is optionally in communication with one or more sensors, such as camera sensors, optical sensors, depth sensors, capacitive sensors, intensity sensors, motion sensors, vibration sensors, and / or audio sensors.

[0002] As described herein, this method provides intuitive control of a computer system based on variable characteristics of hardware inputs in accordance with some embodiments. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for operating computer system operations, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to operate a computer system faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[0003] The computer system detects, via the first input device, a first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device (e.g., one or more presses, taps, clicks, swipes, and / or other manipulations of the first input device), for example, as illustrated in FIGS.6D, 6F-6J, 6K-6R, 6T-6W-1, and 6Y-6AI, where the computer system detects various inputs via the hardware button and / or the touch-sensitive surface of the display, such as press inputs, swipe / drag inputs, flick inputs, and / or tap inputs.

[0004] In response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs (in some embodiments, a single input; In some embodiments, a single continuous contact with the first input device 1615614854 483Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 that includes multiple component inputs, such as a press, followed by movement) and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a first set of criteria, the computer system performs a first operation (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-6P, 6U-6W, and 6AA-6AI, where, in response to detecting movement via the hardware button and / or the touch-sensitive surface of the display, the computer system makes adjustments to the camera settings based on the movements) (e.g., changing an appearance of a user interface, displaying a menu, selecting an option, changing a setting, and / or previewing a media capture effect; e.g., displaying controls for and / or changing a zoom level, an exposure level, an f-stop value for a synthetic depth-of-field effect, a selected subject / focal point, a saturation level, a color balance setting, and / or a capture guidance setting). In some embodiments, the first operation is performed based on the movement of the first type, e.g., changing a setting based on a direction and magnitude of the movement. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first input does not satisfy the first set of criteria, the computer system foregoes performing the first operation. In some embodiments, the first set of criteria are satisfied when the set of inputs includes a light / partial press accompanied by movement on the first input device, e.g., simultaneously (e.g., maintaining a light / partial inward press while moving a finger across the surface of the first input device), with some temporal overlap (e.g., beginning to move the finger while performing a light / partial press), and / or sequentially (e.g., beginning to move the finger across the surface of the first input device within a threshold period of time after releasing / lifting the light / partial press). The first set of criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a first detected intensity that exceeds a first threshold intensity (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6I-6K and 6T, where the computer system detects hardware button state (D), a light / partial press state, and thereafter (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-1-6P and 6U-6W) responds to movement inputs) (e.g., a light / partial press threshold; In some embodiments, a force or pressure threshold, e.g., 25 g / cm3, 50 g / cm3, or 100 g / cm3; In some embodiments, a threshold mechanical state corresponding to the first threshold intensity, e.g., detecting physical depression of a mechanical button to a light / partial press state as a substitute measurement for force / pressure) and a second criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes more than a threshold amount of movement of a first type (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-1-6P and 6U-6W, showing non-negligible lateral movements, e.g., movements across the surface of the hardware button and / or the touch-sensitive surface of the display). In some embodiments, the first threshold intensity is an activation threshold, such that the first criterion remains satisfied 1615614854 484Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 once the detected intensity exceeds the first (e.g., activation) threshold intensity until a different set of conditions are met, e.g., until the applied pressure exceeds a higher threshold pressure (e.g., transitioning to a hard / full press); until the detected intensity drops below a lower, maintenance threshold intensity; until a release of the first input is detected; and / or until a threshold period of time passes without detecting particular inputs and / or input characteristics. In some embodiments, a movement of the first type includes a movement component perpendicular to the direction of the first detected intensity, such as swiping and / or flicking gestures across, over, and / or around the surface of the first input device that the first detected intensity is pressing into. In some embodiments, a movement of the first type includes a lift-off movement from the first input device, such as discrete tapping and / or flicking gestures. In some embodiments, the threshold amount includes a threshold distance / length of movement, e.g., 0.1mm, 1 mm, 2.5mm, or 1cm. In some embodiments, the first set of criteria includes a criterion that is met when the first detected intensity does not exceed a higher threshold intensity (e.g., the second threshold intensity) for at least a threshold period of time (e.g., 0.05s, 0.25s, 0.7s, or 1s) after the first detected intensity exceeds the first threshold intensity. For example, if the first input quickly transitions from a light / partial press to a hard / full press, the computer system foregoes performing the first operation. In some embodiments, the first set of criteria includes a criterion that is met when the second criterion is met after the first criterion is met. For example, the first set of criteria are only met if more than the threshold amount of movement of the first type is detected after detecting the first threshold intensity. In some embodiments, the first set of criteria includes a criterion that is met when the second criterion is met within a threshold period of time after the first criterion is met and / or when the second criteria is met while displaying a particular user interface, e.g., the user can briefly lift and replace a finger while making the movement. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies at least the first criterion but not the second criterion (e.g., in response to detecting a light / partial press input without accompanying movement), the computer system performs a different operation, such as changing the appearance of a user interface without changing a setting. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies the second criterion and not the first criterion (e.g., in response to detecting movement without detecting an activation pressure), the computer system foregoes responding to the first input.

[0005] In response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs at the location corresponding to the first 1615614854 485Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 input device satisfies a second set of criteria different from the first set of criteria (in some embodiments, the second set of criteria are satisfied when the press input is a hard / full press), the computer system performs a second operation different from the first operation (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6R-6S and 6V-6Z, where the computer system performs photo and video media captures) (in some embodiments, a media capture operation, e.g., capturing photo media, initiating capture of video media, and / or stopping capture of video media), wherein the second set of criteria includes a third criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a second detected intensity that exceeds a second threshold intensity that is higher than the first threshold intensity (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6R and 6V, where the computer system performs media capture operations in response to detecting hardware button state (E), a full / hard press state) (e.g., a hard / full press threshold; In some embodiments, a force or pressure threshold, e.g., 100 g / cm3, 150 g / cm3, or 200 g / cm3; In some embodiments, a threshold mechanical state corresponding to the second threshold intensity, e.g., detecting physical depression of a mechanical button to a hard / full press state as a substitute measurement for force / pressure). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first input does not satisfy the second set of criteria, the computer system forgoes performing the second operation. Conditionally performing a first operation in response to a lower-intensity input that includes movement and performing a second operation in response to a higher-intensity input provides improved control of computer system functionality without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, a user can quickly and easily switch back and forth between performing the first and second operations merely by changing input intensity and without needing to provide additional inputs, switch between different user interface elements and / or input devices, e.g., a hardware button and a touch- sensitive display. Doing so also provides improved ergonomics of computer systems, for example, by expanding the controls available using a particular input device and reducing the need for users to move their hands back and forth between different user interface elements and / or input devices, which also reduces the overall number of hardware components needed for control (e.g., compared to mapping the first and second operation to different input devices), resulting in a more compact, lighter, and cheaper device. 1615614854 486Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501

[0006] In some embodiments, if the input reaches the first threshold and then the second threshold, the second operation is modified by the first operation. In some embodiments performing the second operation includes, in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfied the first set of criteria (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-6P and 6T-6U, where the computer system detects a light / partial press followed by lateral movements) prior to satisfying the second set of criteria (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6R and 6V, where the computer system detects a full / hard press) (e.g., the first set of one or more inputs exceeds the first (lower) threshold intensity and includes more than a threshold amount of movement of a first type, and the computer system performs the first operation, before the first set of one or more inputs exceeds the second (higher) threshold intensity), performing the second operation based on a respective (e.g., current) value of an operation setting (e.g., for a media capture operation, the operation setting includes zoom level, exposure / brightness level, applied filter type, filter intensity, media capture type, selected subject / focus, and / or simulated depth-of-field / focal length setting), wherein performing the first operation includes changing the operation setting to the respective value (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6R-6S and 6V-6Z, where the computer system captures media at the zoom level selected using the previous light / partial presses with movement). For example, the user modifies the operation setting using a lower-intensity input with movement (e.g., increasing the zoom level to 2.0x), then transitions to a higher-intensity input to perform the second operation using (e.g., according to) the modified operation setting (e.g., taking a photo at 2.0x zoom). Changing a setting in response to a lower-intensity input that includes movement that modifies the performance of the second operation in response to a higher-intensity input provides improved control of computer system functionality without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, a user can quickly and easily switch back and forth between performing the second operation and adjusting the setting of the second operation without needing to provide additional inputs, such as opening a separate settings menu. Doing so also provides improved ergonomics of computer systems, for example, by providing related controls using a particular input device and reducing the need for users to move their hands back and forth between different user interface elements and / or input devices. 1615614854 487Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501

[0007] In some embodiments, performing the first operation includes changing an operation setting (e.g., zoom level, exposure / brightness level, applied filter type, filter intensity, media capture type, selected subject / focus, and / or simulated depth-of-field / focal length setting) to a respective value (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-6P, 6U-6W, and 6AA-6AI) (e.g., a value selected using the first type of input); and performing the second operation includes performing the second operation based on a current value of the operation setting (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6R-6S and 6V-6Z, where the computer system captures media at the zoom level selected using the previous light / partial presses with movement) (e.g., performing a media capture operation with the current zoom level, exposure / brightness level, applied filter type, filter intensity, media capture type, selected subject / focus, and / or simulated depth- of-field / focal length setting), wherein, in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfied the first set of criteria prior to satisfying the second set of criteria (e.g., the first set of one or more inputs exceeds the first (lower) threshold intensity and includes more than a threshold amount of movement of a first type, and the computer system performs the first operation, before the first set of one or more inputs exceeds the second (higher) threshold intensity), the current value of the operation setting is the respective value. For example, if the first operation is performed prior to the second operation, the first operation modifies the performance of the second operation. For example, the user modifies the operation setting using a lower-intensity input with movement (e.g., increasing the zoom level to 2.0x), then transitions to a higher-intensity input to perform the second operation using (e.g., according to) the modified operation setting (e.g., taking a photo at 2.0x zoom). Changing a setting of the second operation in response to a lower-intensity input that includes movement and performing the second operation in response to a higher-intensity input provides improved control of computer system functionality without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, a user can quickly and easily switch back and forth between performing the second operation and adjusting the setting of the second operation without needing to provide additional inputs, such as opening a separate settings menu. Doing so also provides improved ergonomics of computer systems, for example, by providing related controls using a particular input device and reducing the need for users to move their hands back and forth between different user interface elements and / or input devices. 1615614854 488Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501

[0008] In some embodiments, the first operation is a media capture parameter adjustment operation, and the second operation is a media capture operation. In some embodiments, performing the first operation includes changing a media capture setting (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-6P, 6U-6W, and 6AA-6AI, where the computer system adjusts zoom, synthetic depth-of-field, focus, filter, and capture mode settings in response to light / partial press inputs accompanied by lateral movements) (e.g., modifying a zoom level, exposure / brightness level, applied filter type, filter intensity, media capture type, selected subject / focus, and / or simulated depth-of-field / focal length setting). In some embodiments, changing the media capture setting includes updating display of a media capture preview (e.g., a camera viewfinder) according to the changed media capture setting, allowing the user to preview the changed setting for media capture. In some embodiments, performing the second operation includes capturing media (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6R-6S and 6V-6Z, where the computer system performs photo and video capture operations in response to full / hard press inputs) (e.g., based on the current value(s) of one or more media capture settings including the media capture setting that is changed via the first operation). In some embodiments, capturing media includes capturing a still photo. In some embodiments, capturing media includes capturing photo media with a limited duration, such as a short (e.g., 0.25, 0.5, 1, 3, and / or 5 second) multi-frame capture that includes content from before and / or after a capture input (e.g., the full / hard press) is detected, creating a “live” effect. In some embodiments, capturing media includes capturing video media. In some embodiments, if the computer system performs the first operation changing the media capture setting to a respective value before performing the second operation (e.g., and does not detect subsequent input(s) satisfying the first set of criteria, resulting in further changes to the media capture setting), capturing media is performed based on the respective value of the media capture setting. In some embodiments, the media capture setting is a setting of a set of media capture settings that is currently associated with an input device used to detect the first set of one or more inputs. For example, if a zoom setting is associated with a hardware button when the first set of one or more inputs is detected, the first operation modifies the zoom level for media capture, and if an exposure setting is associated with a hardware button when the first set of one or more inputs is detected, the first operation modifies the exposure level for media capture. Changing a media capture setting in response to a lower-intensity input that includes movement and performing a media capture in response to a higher-intensity input provides improved control of media capture without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also assists the user with composing media capture events and 1615614854 489Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 reduces the risk that transient media capture opportunities are missed or captured with unintended settings, which enhances the operability and ergonomics of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, a user can quickly and easily switch back and forth between capturing media and adjusting the settings for capturing media merely by changing input intensity and without needing to provide additional inputs (such as opening a separate settings menu) or to switch between different user interface elements and / or input devices.

[0009] In some embodiments, the media capture parameter adjustment operation adjusts zoom. In some embodiments, the media capture setting includes a zoom setting (e.g., magnification level) for media capture (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-6P and 6T-6W). In some embodiments, changing the zoom setting includes adjusting zoom optically (e.g., switching between cameras / lenses with different magnifications) and / or digitally.

[0010] In some embodiments, the media capture parameter adjustment operation adjusts a filter. In some embodiments, the media capture setting includes a filter setting for media capture (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6AE-6AF, where the computer system changes between different media capture filter types, and / or FIG.6AG, where the computer system changes filter intensity) (e.g., an adjustment to and / or overlay of media capture, such as filters for color grading, tone adjustment, blurring, smoothing, vignetting, noise reduction, and / or applying other visual and / or audio effects). In some embodiments, changing the filter setting includes changing the type of filter being applied. For example, the computer system switches between a cool color grading filter, a warm color grading filter, and a monochrome color grading filter, or switches between a color grading filter, a bokeh filter, and a cartoon face filter. In some embodiments, changing the filter setting includes changing the intensity of a filter being applied. For example, for a monochrome color grading filter, a filter intensity of 100% results in an entirely grayscale media capture, a filter intensity of 50% results in a moderately desaturated (but still full-color) media capture, and a filter intensity of 0% results in a media capture with un-adjusted saturation.

[0011] In some embodiments, the media capture parameter adjustment operation adjusts simulated depth of field. In some embodiments, the media capture setting includes a simulated depth-of-field setting for media capture (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6AA-6AB, 1615614854 490Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 where the computer system adjusts a simulated focal length setting (e.g., changing which portions of the media capture are blurred to simulate capture using a particular focal length), and / or 6AC-6AD, where the computer system adjusts which subject of the media capture is in focus (e.g., not blurring the selected subject)) (e.g., a setting for simulating capture with a particular focal length (f-stop) by selectively blurring portions of a media capture that would not be in focus (e.g., would be outside of the depth-of-field) when captured using a lens with the particular focal length). In some embodiments, changing the simulated depth-of-field setting includes changing the simulated focal length (f-stop), e.g., from f / 1.8 to f / 8.4.

[0012] In some embodiments, the media capture parameter adjustment operation adjusts media capture type. In some embodiments, the media capture setting includes a media capture type setting (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6AH-6AI, where the computer system changes from a photo capture mode to a video capture mode). In some embodiments, changing the media capture type setting includes selecting between capture modes, such as standard photo capture, portrait photo capture (e.g., photo capture with applied lighting and / or simulated depth-of-field effects), standard video capture, cinematic video capture (e.g., video capture with applied lighting and / or simulated depth-of-field effects and / or enhanced capture quality, such as high frame rate and / or high resolution), and / or panoramic photo capture. In some embodiments, changing the media capture type setting includes changing a capture type option, such as toggling multi-frame photo capture or spatial capture (e.g., capture including depth information) on or off.

[0013] In some embodiments, the media capture parameter adjustment operation adjusts which object is selected for focus. In some embodiments, the media capture setting includes a focus subject selection (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6AC-6AD). In some embodiments, changing the focus subject selection includes changing which subject included in a camera preview (e.g., a detected person, pet, and / or other content) is in focus. For example, the computer system can change which subject is in focus by changing the application of simulated depth-of-field effects (e.g., blurring) to keep the selected subject in focus (e.g., unblurred).

[0014] In some embodiments, the first operation based on the movement is a selection operation from an ordered sequence of values (e.g., as further described with respect to FIGS. 14A-14S). In some embodiments, performing the first operation includes selecting, based on one or more characteristics of the movement of the first type (e.g., direction, location, distance, speed, acceleration, and / or input style (e.g., movement as part of a drag, flick, tap, 1615614854 491Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 and / or press)), a first settings value (e.g., parameter value) from an ordered sequence of settings values (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-6P, 6T-6W, 6AA-6AB, and 6AG, where the computer system increments and decrements the numeric zoom level (e.g., between 0.5x and 8.0x), simulated focal length (e.g., between f / 1.8 and f / 8.0), and filter intensity (e.g., from 0% to 100%) in response to light / partial press inputs accompanied by lateral movements) (e.g., an incremented set of possible parameter values for a setting, such as zoom levels between 0.5x- 12.0x magnification in increments of 0.1x, simulated f-stop values between f / 32 and f / 1.2 in increments of 0.1x (or variable increments, such as f / 0.1 steps from f / 1.2 to f / 4.8 and f / 2.0 steps from f / 6 to f / 32), and / or filter intensity levels between 0%-100% in increments of 1%). In some embodiments, selecting the settings value from the ordered sequence of settings based on the characteristics of the movement of the first type includes incrementing / decrementing the settings value by an amount based on a distance of the movement of the first type (e.g., the distance moved along a particular axis and / or on a particular sensing area), at a rate based on a speed or acceleration of the movement of the first type, and / or in a direction (e.g., incrementing up or down) based on a direction of the movement of the first type. In some embodiments, selecting a settings value from an ordered sequence of settings based on the characteristics of the movement of the first type includes using simulated physics to model the selection of the settings value from the ordered sequence of settings, e.g., as if the movement of the first type were adjusting a physical control for the setting, such as a knob, dial, wheel, and / or slider, which the computer system can model with simulated physical characteristics (e.g., size, weight, friction, and / or elasticity). Providing selection from an ordered sequence of settings values in response to a lower-intensity input that includes movement provides improved control of computer system functionality without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, selecting from the ordered sequence of settings using input movement provides fine-grained control of settings in an intuitive manner without needing to display additional controls or input fields.

[0015] In some embodiments, the first operation includes adjusting a value with inertia based on movement. In some embodiments, the first settings value is selected from the ordered sequence of settings values by simulating a transfer of momentum from the movement of the 1615614854 492Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 first type to a model of the ordered sequence of settings values (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS. 6K-1-6N, where the computer system continues to adjust the zoom level after the input lifts off (e.g., in FIGS.6L and 6N), simulating momentum from the flicking motion of the input, and / or as further described with respect to FIGS.14A-14S, where the computer system continues to adjust the setting value even after the inputs lift off if movement was detected near the end of the press input). For example, when a touch input lifts from a touch-sensitive surface while swiping in a particular direction, the computer system continues to change the settings value (e.g., increments the settings value in the same direction) after the lift-off as if momentum from the first type of movement were transferring to a physical control (e.g., a knob, dial, wheel, and / or slider) for the setting. Selecting (e.g., adjusting) a settings value by simulating the transfer of momentum from the input movement provides improved control of computer system functionality, reducing the number of inputs needed to adjust settings and improving ergonomics of computer systems, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, simulating the physics intuitively translates input movement into a settings adjustment (e.g., as if moving a physical control element) and, by continuing to adjust the settings with some transferred momentum (e.g., adjusting after the end of the movement), the user can reach particular settings values with less movement and / or fewer inputs (e.g., using a quick flick to scroll with momentum to a particular setting rather than needing to drag the whole distance or drag, lift, and reset), which also allows for optimized input device size.

[0016] In some embodiments, a drag moves to a dynamically selected value and a quick flick moves to the next snapping value instead of a dynamically adjusted value (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-1-6N, where the computer system ad and / or as further described with respect to FIGS.14A-14S). In some embodiments, the ordered sequence of settings values includes a subset of one or more preset values (e.g., 8.0x zoom, 2.0x zoom, 1.0x zoom, and / or 0.5x zoom) (e.g., “snapping” values, for example: preset zoom levels of 0.5x, 1.0x, 2.0x, and 8.0x; preset simulated f-stop values of f / 1.2, f / 2.4, and f / 4.6; and / or preset filter intensity levels of 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100%). In some embodiments, selecting, based on the one or more characteristics of the movement of the first type, the first settings value from the ordered sequence of settings values includes, in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a set of one or more drag criteria (e.g., during a drag input, e.g., a moving input that remains in contact with the first input device), selecting the first settings 1615614854 493Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 value from the ordered sequence of settings values based on a direction of the movement of the first type and an amount of the movement of the first type (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS. 6K-6K-1 and 6M, where the computer system adjusts the zoom level to 3.4x, 4.0x, 2.8x, and / or 2.4x in response to swiping or dragging inputs detected while the finger remains in contact with the hardware button and / or touch-sensitive surface of the display), wherein the set of one or more drag criteria includes a criterion that is met when the first set of one or more inputs includes a current detected intensity that exceeds a third threshold intensity (e.g., while contact is maintained; In some embodiments, the third threshold intensity is the same as the first threshold intensity; In some embodiments, the third threshold intensity is lower than the first threshold intensity). For example, while the user is providing a drag input, such as a touch input moving across a touch-sensitive surface without lifting off (and / or falling below a maintenance intensity threshold), the computer system adjusts the settings value by scrolling through the ordered sequence of settings values by an amount and in a direction commensurate to the distance and direction of the movement.

[0017] In some embodiments, selecting, based on the one or more characteristics of the movement of the first type, the first settings value from the ordered sequence of settings values includes, in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a set of one or more flick criteria (e.g., during a flick input, e.g., a moving input quickly followed by lift-off), selecting the first settings value from the subset of one or more preset values based on a direction of the movement of the first type (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6L and 6N, where the computer system adjusts the zoom level to 8.0x and / or 2.0x in response to flick inputs that lift off of the hardware button and / or touch-sensitive surface of the display while moving) (e.g., the computer system “snaps” to the next preset value in the ordered sequence in the direction of the flick). In some embodiments, the set of one or more flick criteria include a first flick criterion that is met when the first set of one or more inputs does not include a current detected intensity that exceeds the third threshold intensity (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6L and 6N, where the finger lifts off of the hardware button and / or touch- sensitive surface of the display). For example, the first flick criterion is met when contact with the first input device lifts off and / or falls below a maintenance intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the set of one or more flick criteria include a second flick criterion that is met when the movement of the first type includes more than a second threshold amount of movement within a threshold period of time before the first flick criterion is met (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-1 and 6M-1, where the finger is swiping or dragging right before it 1615614854 494Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 lifts off of the hardware button and / or touch-sensitive surface of the display). For example, the second flick criterion is met when the input is moving at or near the end of contact with the first input device, e.g., the movement is a quick flick rather than a drag that comes to a stop prior to lift-off. In some embodiments, the set of one or more flick criterion include a third flick criterion that is met when the movement of the first type includes movement in the direction of one of the preset values. For example, flicking to zoom in from 5.5x will snap to 8.0x, but flicking to zoom in from 8.5x will not snap to a preset value (e.g., instead simply stopping adjustment when the input ends or continuing to adjust with some simulated momentum from the flick) as no preset values above 8.0x are included in the subset. As another example, flicking to increase filter intensity from 100% (e.g., a maximum preset value) will not snap to a higher value, but flicking to decrease filter intensity from 100% will snap to the next preset value of 75%. In some embodiments, the set of one or more flick criterion include a fourth flick criterion that is met when simulated momentum from the flick would adjust the settings value past one of the preset values, for example, as described with respect to FIGS.14A-XX and 15. Adjusting continuously through the ordered sequence of values in response to movement during input contact (e.g., drag movements) and adjusting by skipping between preset values of the ordered sequence in response to movement quickly followed by lift-off (e.g., flick movements) makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. Doing so also provides improved ergonomics of computer systems. For example, the user can achieve both fine-grained controls (scrolling through the entire ordered sequence of values) and quick / optimized (snapping between preset values) simply by changing movement style from a drag to a flick, without needing to provide additional inputs or use different user interface elements and / or input devices.

[0018] In some embodiments, the first operation based on the movement is a selection operation from a predetermined set of values. In some embodiments, performing the first operation includes selecting, based on one or more characteristics of the movement of the first type (e.g., direction, location, distance, speed, acceleration, and / or input style (e.g., movement as part of a drag, flick, tap, and / or press)), a second settings value (e.g., parameter value) from a predetermined set of settings values (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6L and / or 6N, where the computer system adjusts the zoom to the preselected zoom values 8.0x and / or 2.0x 1615614854 495Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in response to flicking inputs, and / or 6AC-6AF, and / or 6AH-6AI, where the computer system adjusts the camera settings between discrete sets of states, such as selecting between three identified subjects to focus on, selecting between available filter types, and / or switching between available capture modes) (e.g., a set of available, preselected, and / or preferred values for the setting). For example, for a focus selection setting, the predetermined set of settings values includes each of a group of subjects identified (e.g., detected) in the camera preview, e.g., allowing the user to select between focusing on a first subject, a second subject, and / or a third subject. For example, for a filter setting, the predetermined set of settings values includes available filters, such as a warm tone filter, a cool tone filter, a monochromatic filter, a sepia filter, a cartoon face filter, and / or a smoothing filter. For example, for a media capture type setting, the predetermine set of settings values includes available capture types, such as standard photo capture, standard video capture, portrait photo capture, cinematic video capture, and so forth. In some embodiments, the predetermined set of settings values is a subset of one or more preset settings values (e.g., snapping values) included in an ordered sequence of settings values. In some embodiments, the second settings value is the same as the first settings value. Providing selection from a predetermined set of settings values in response to a lower-intensity input that includes movement provides improved control of computer system functionality without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, selecting from the predetermined settings values using input movement allows the user to adjust settings in a quick and intuitive manner without needing to display additional controls.

[0019] In some embodiments, if movement occurs before the press input reaches the first threshold, no operation is performed (e.g., because the input is ignored or because the sensor is not monitoring inputs) (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6G and / or 6Y, where the computer system does not adjust the zoom level in response to movement inputs detected before the computer system detects a light / partial press (e.g., while the computer system is not displaying the settings adjustment UI element)). In some embodiments, the first set of criteria includes a fourth criterion that is satisfied when the second criterion (e.g., which is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes more than a threshold amount of 1615614854 496Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 movement of a first type) is satisfied after the first criterion (e.g., which is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a first detected intensity that exceeds a first threshold intensity) is satisfied (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-6P and / or 6U-6W, where the computer system adjusts the zoom level in response to movement inputs detected after the computer system detects light / partial press inputs in FIGS.6I and 6T). In some embodiments, if the computer system detects (e.g., via the first input device) movement before the first set of inputs reaches the first threshold intensity, the computer system ignores the movement and / or foregoes perform the first operation. In some embodiments, the computer system foregoes detecting movement using the first input device until the first criterion is satisfied, for example, leaving the movement sensors of the first input device in an off or inactive state until the first threshold intensity is exceeded (e.g., until a light press is detected). Conditionally performing the first operation in response to input movement based on whether or not an input exceeding the first threshold intensity has been detected makes the user- system interface more efficient by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, performing the first operation in response to movement after the first threshold intensity has been exceeded increases confidence that the user intends to perform the first operation, decreasing the likelihood of unintended inputs while still allowing the user to quickly and intuitively perform the first operation. Doing so also improves the ergonomics and extensibility of the first input device, for example, allowing placement of the first input device in an area the user might touch or move across without wanting to perform the first operation and / or allowing movement on the first input device without first exceeding the first threshold intensity to be mapped to other functionality.

[0020] In some embodiments, if a press input reaches the first threshold and then shifts below first threshold, control element remains responsive to movement input (e.g., perform the first operation based on movement that occurs after the input shifts below the first threshold) (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6J-6P and 6U, where, after detecting hardware button state (D) in FIGS.6I and 6T (e.g., a light / partial press), the computer system adjusts the zoom level in response to movement inputs detected while the hardware button is in hardware button state (B), (C) and / or (D)). In some embodiments, performing the first operation includes in accordance with a determination that a first movement input included in the set of one or more inputs satisfies a third set of criteria, performing the first operation based on the first 1615614854 497Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 movement input (e.g., responding to the first movement input), wherein the third set of criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the first movement input is detected after the first criterion is satisfied (e.g., after the first set of one or more inputs includes the first detected intensity that exceeds the first threshold intensity) and after the first set of one or more inputs includes a third detected intensity that does not exceed the first threshold intensity (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6J-6P and 6U, where the computer system detects and responds movement inputs while detecting hardware button state (B) and / or (C), which are lower intensity presses than hardware button state (D)) (e.g., in accordance with a determination that the first movement input is detected after initially reaching the first threshold intensity (e.g., activation threshold) and then falling below the first threshold intensity). For example, the computer system performs the first operation based on movement that occurs after the press input shifts below the light / partial press threshold (e.g., an activation threshold). In some embodiments, the first movement is more than the threshold amount of movement of the first type, e.g., the second criterion can be satisfied by the first movement input. In some embodiments, the third set of criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied if the first movement input is detected while the third detected intensity exceeds a lower threshold intensity (e.g., a maintenance threshold; In some embodiments, a force or pressure threshold, e.g., 5 g / cm3, 10 g / cm3, or 24 g / cm3; In some embodiments, a threshold mechanical state corresponding to the lower threshold intensity). In some embodiments, the computer system does not perform the first operation based on a movement that is detected when the third detected intensity does not exceed the lower threshold intensity. For example, after reaching the activation intensity, the computer system remains responsive to movement while the maintenance intensity is maintained, but the computer system does not respond to movement inputs when the intensity falls below the maintenance threshold. Performing the first operation based on movement that occurs after the input intensity exceeds and subsequently falls below the first intensity threshold makes the user- system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. Doing so also provides improved ergonomics of computer systems. For example, performing the first operation is initially gated by the first intensity threshold, which reduces inadvertent performance of the first operation (e.g., in response to a user unintentionally brushing, touching, or bumping an input device), but after the first intensity threshold is reached, the computer system remains responsive to movement 1615614854 498Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 even after the intensity drops, making it easier for users to continuously control the first operation.

[0021] In some embodiments, the control element remains responsive to movement after liftoff for a threshold amount of time and then stops being responsive to movement after the threshold amount of time. In some embodiments, performing the first operation includes, in accordance with a determination that a second movement input included in the set of one or more inputs satisfies a fourth set of criteria, performing the first operation based on the second movement input (e.g., responding to the first movement input), wherein the fourth set of criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the second movement input is detected before a duration of a lift-off event (in some embodiments, a period where contact with the first input device has ceased; In some embodiments, a period where input intensity has dropped below a maintenance intensity threshold) exceeds a first threshold amount of time (e.g., 0.5s, 1s, or 1.3s) (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6L-6M-1, where, after the user briefly lifts the finger off of the hardware button and / or touch-sensitive surface of the display at FIG.6L, the computer system continues to adjust the zoom level in response to the movement inputs illustrated in FIGS.6M-6M-1). In some embodiments, performing the first operation includes, in accordance with a determination that the second movement input included in the set of one or more inputs does not satisfy the fourth set of criteria, forgoing performing the first operation based on the second movement input (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6W-1-6Y, where, after the user has lifted the finger off of the hardware button and / or the touch-sensitive surface of the display at 6W-1 and a threshold period of time has passed without detecting further inputs at the hardware button and / or the touch-sensitive surface at FIG.6X, the computer system does not adjust the zoom in response to the movement inputs illustrated in FIG.6Y). For example, the computer system will perform the first operation based on movement inputs detected after a brief, temporary lift-off (e.g., of the user’s finger or stylus from the first input device), but will stop responding to subsequent movements if the lift-off exceeds the threshold amount of time (e.g., until responsiveness is reestablished by detecting an input that satisfies the first set of criteria). In some embodiments, the second movement is more than the threshold amount of movement of the first type, e.g., the second criterion can be satisfied by the second movement input. In some embodiments, the third set of criteria and the fourth set of criteria partially or wholly overlap. For example, the computer system remains responsive to movement detected after the input intensity drops below the first threshold (e.g., and satisfies the third set of criteria) until a lift-off exceeds a threshold 1615614854 499Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 duration (e.g., no longer satisfying the fourth set of criteria). Performing the first operation based on detected movement inputs until lift-off exceeds a threshold duration of time makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. Doing so also provides improved ergonomics of computer systems. For example, the computer system automatically stops responding to movement inputs by performing the first operation after a threshold period of time passes without input contact, which reduces inadvertent performance of the first operation (e.g., in response to a user unintentionally brushing, touching, or bumping an input device), but the computer system remains responsive to movement inputs after brief lift-offs, allowing users to better maintain and adjust control of the first operation.

[0022] In some embodiments, a control element remains responsive to movement while the input is still detected (e.g., based on pressure and / or capacitive touch). In some embodiments, performing the first operation includes, in accordance with a determination that a third movement input included in the set of one or more inputs satisfies a fifth set of criteria, performing the first operation based on the third movement input (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-6L and / or 6U-6W) (e.g., responding to the first movement input), wherein the fifth set of criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the third movement input is detected while the first set of inputs includes an input of a respective type (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-6L and / or 6U-6W, as long as the computer system detects hardware button state (B), (C), and / or (D) (e.g., as long as contact and / or a light / partial press is maintained after initially detecting hardware button state (D)), the computer system continues to adjust the zoom level in response to movement inputs). For example, the computer system performs the first operation in response to movements as long as the first input device continues to detect input based on another (e.g., non-movement) input characteristic, such as input intensity or capacitive touch. In some embodiments, the input of a respective type is an input with an intensity that exceeds a maintenance intensity, such as a force or pressure threshold (e.g., 5 g / cm3, 10 g / cm3, or 24 g / cm3) or a threshold mechanical state corresponding to a low intensity. In some embodiments, the input of a respective type is an input detected using capacitive sensing, such as a finger hovering over or lightly touching (e.g., applying negligible force to) a capacitive touch sensor. Performing the first operation based on movements detected while maintaining an input via an input device (e.g., by maintaining 1615614854 500Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 contact or proximity) makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. Doing so also provides improved ergonomics of computer systems. For example, performing the first operation is initially gated by the first intensity threshold, which reduces inadvertent performance of the first operation (e.g., in response to a user unintentionally brushing, touching, or bumping an input device), but after the first intensity threshold is reached, the computer system remains responsive to movement as long as input is maintained (e.g., by maintaining contact or proximity), making it easier for users to continuously control the first operation.

[0023] In some embodiments, if press input reaches the second threshold and then shifts below first threshold but stays on button, control element remains responsive to movement input (e.g., perform the first operation based on movement that occurs after the input shifts below the first threshold). In some embodiments, after performing the second operation, the computer system detects, via the first input device, a fourth movement input (e.g., a swipe, drag, flick, and / or tap); and in accordance with a determination that a lift-off event (in some embodiments, a period where contact with the first input device has ceased; In some embodiments, a period where input intensity has dropped below a maintenance intensity threshold) was not detected in between detecting the second detected intensity that exceeds the second threshold intensity (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6V, where the computer system detects hardware button state (E), e.g., a full / hard press) and detecting the fourth movement input (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6W, where the finger remains in contact with the hardware button and / or the touch-sensitive surface of the display), the computer system performs the first operation based on the fourth movement input (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6W, the computer system adjusts the zoom level in response to the swipe / drag movement, as the user did not end contact with the hardware button and / or touch-sensitive surface of the display after performing the full / hard press to begin video capture). For example, after an input reaches the second threshold intensity (e.g., the full / hard press threshold), triggering performance of the second operation, the computer system remains responsive to movement inputs as long as / until the input is ended via lift-off. For example, a user can take a picture (second operation) using a full / hard press and then continue to adjust media capture settings (first operation) via movement inputs without needing to re-apply or maintain the first threshold intensity (e.g., light / partial press activation intensity). 1615614854 501Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501

[0024] In some embodiments, if press input reaches the second threshold and then moves off of the button, the control element ceases to be responsive to movement input (e.g., don't perform the first operation based on movement that occurs after the input shifts below the first threshold). In some embodiments, after performing the second operation, the computer system detects, via the first input device, a fifth movement input (e.g., a swipe, drag, flick, and / or tap); and in accordance with a determination that a lift-off event (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6W-1-6X, where the finger lifted off of the hardware button and / or the touch-sensitive surface of the display) (in some embodiments, a period where contact with the first input device has ceased; In some embodiments, a period where input intensity has dropped below a maintenance intensity threshold) was detected in between detecting the second detected intensity that exceeds the second threshold intensity (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6V, where the computer system detects hardware button state (E), e.g., a full / hard press) and detecting the fifth movement input, the computer system foregoes performing the first operation based on the fifth movement input (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6Y, where the computer system does not adjust the zoom in response to the swipe / drag movements because the user ended contact with the hardware button and / or touch-sensitive surface of the display after performing the full / hard press to begin video capture). For example, after an input reaches the second threshold intensity (e.g., the full / hard press threshold), triggering performance of the second operation, the computer system remains responsive to movement inputs as long as / until the input is ended via lift-off. For example, after a user takes a picture (second operation) using a full / hard press and ends the first set of inputs (e.g., lifts off of the first input device), the user must re-apply the first threshold intensity (e.g., light / partial press activation intensity) before adjusting media capture settings (first operation) using movement inputs.

[0025] In some embodiments, when the first threshold is reached, generate a non-visual feedback (e.g., audio and / or tactile output). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a sixth set of criteria, the computer system provides a non-visual feedback output (e.g., an audio and / or tactile output), wherein the sixth set of criteria includes the first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes the first detected intensity that exceeds the first threshold intensity (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6I, where the computer system provides a tactile / haptic output in response to detecting hardware button state (D)) (e.g., the activation intensity threshold). For example, when the user presses the first input device with sufficient intensity to exceed the first threshold intensity, the computer system generates non-visual feedback, 1615614854 502Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 such as an audio chime or click, a vibration, and / or a haptic response such as a haptic simulating the tactile sensation of physically depressing a button. In some embodiments, the sixth set of criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs did not include an intensity that exceeds the first threshold intensity prior to detecting the first detected intensity, e.g., the non-visual feedback is only provided when the threshold is initially reached, and is not provided again in response to the first set of one or more inputs. Providing non-visual feedback when an input meets the first criterion (e.g., exceeds a threshold intensity) provides users with real-time feedback about a state of the computer system, which assists the user with control of the computer system via the first input device. Doing so also makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, the non-visual feedback indicates to a user that the first criterion is met, and thus, that the computer system will respond to movements by performing the first operation, allowing the user to quickly initiate control of the first operation (e.g., without checking for displayed feedback) or to end the input if control of the first operation is not immediately desired.

[0026] In some embodiments, the control element is a hardware button. In some embodiments, the first input device includes a first hardware button (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6A-6C). In some embodiments, the first hardware button includes a mechanical button, such as a button that can be physically depressed to one or more states. In some embodiments, the first hardware button includes a solid-state button, such as a button that simulates the tactile sensation (e.g., via tactile / haptic output generators) of pressing a mechanical button. In some embodiments, the first hardware button includes one or more sensors, such as pressure sensors, touch sensors, capacitive sensors, and / or motion sensors. Providing control of multiple different operations using a hardware button provides improved control and ergonomics of computer systems without cluttering a displayed user interface with additional controls, which makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), and, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, a user can control the first and second operations via a dedicated hardware button instead of via touch-sensitive display, which reduces the need to display controls for 1615614854 503Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 the first and second operations and allows the user to control the first and second operations without obscuring the display. Conditionally providing control of multiple different operations using a hardware button based on intensity and movement characteristics of detected inputs also reduces the overall number of hardware components needed for control (e.g., compared to mapping different functions to different buttons), resulting in a more compact, lighter, and cheaper device.

[0027] In some embodiments, a press and release is used for still photo captured and a long press for video capture (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8A-8P, below). In some embodiments, performing the second operation includes in accordance with a determination that the second detected intensity exceeds the second threshold intensity for over a second threshold amount of time (e.g., 0.5s, 1s, or 1.3s), capturing video media (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6V, 8C-8E, and / or 8H-8I, where video capture is initiated after the user holds a full / hard press for a threshold duration). For example, the computer system captures video in response to a long (e.g., held) full / hard press. In some embodiments, performing the second operation includes, in accordance with a determination that the second detected intensity does not exceed the second threshold intensity for over the second threshold amount of time (e.g., 0.5s, 1s, or 1.3s), capturing photo media (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6R-6S, 8A-8B, and / or 8M-8N, where photo capture is initiated in response to quick full / hard presses). For example, the computer system captures photo media in response to a quick full / hard press. In some embodiments, the computer system captures photo media if, prior to reaching the second threshold amount of time, the full / hard press is released (e.g., the input intensity falls below a threshold intensity and / or a lift-off event occurs). In some embodiments, the computer system captures photo media in response to the full / hard press and, if the full / hard press duration later reaches the second threshold amount of time, also captures video. For example, the computer system preemptively captures photo media and may discard the photo media if the full / hard press resolves into a held press. In some embodiments, the photo media includes a still photo capture. In some embodiments, the photo media includes photo media with a limited duration, such as a short (e.g., 0.25, 0.5, 1, 3, and / or 5 second) multi-frame capture that includes content from before and / or after a capture input (e.g., the full / hard press) is detected, creating a “live” effect. Conditionally performing a photo capture or a video capture in response to a higher-intensity input based on the duration of the higher intensity provides improved control and ergonomics of computer systems without cluttering a displayed user interface with additional controls. Doing so also assists the user with 1615614854 504Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 composing media capture events and reduces the risk that transient media capture opportunities are missed or captured with unintended settings, which enhances the operability and ergonomics of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, a user can quickly select between performing photo and video captures using a full / hard press without needing to move the position of their hands or divert their attention from the capture to use a displayed control. Conditionally providing control of multiple different operations using a hardware button based on a duration of an intensity also reduces the overall number of hardware components needed for control (e.g., compared to mapping different functions to different buttons), resulting in a more compact, lighter, and cheaper device.

[0028] In some embodiments, pressing button while not in a camera application launches the camera application. In some embodiments, the first set of criteria and the second set of criteria each include a camera criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs is detected while the computer system is displaying, via the display generation component, a first camera user interface (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6E-6AI) (e.g., a user interface for media capture, such as a camera application or a social media application with camera functionality). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a set of launch criteria, the computer system displays, via the display generation component, a second camera user interface, wherein the set of launch criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the camera criterion is not satisfied (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6D-6E, where the computer system launches the camera user interface in response to a press detected while displaying a video player interface). For example, the computer system displays, surfaces, and / or launches a camera interface in response to press inputs detected while the camera interface is not already displayed, active, and / or running. In some embodiments, the second camera user interface is the same as the first camera user interface, e.g., the computer system will open a particular camera application if the particular camera application is not already open. In some embodiments, the second camera user interface is different from the first camera user interface, e.g., the computer system will open the particular camera application unless any camera application is already open. In some 1615614854 505Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 embodiments, the set of one or more launch criteria include a criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes detected intensity that exceeds the second threshold intensity (e.g., the full / hard press threshold), e.g., the user can launch a camera application using a hard / full press, and then use a hard / full press while in the camera application to perform the second operation.

[0029] In some embodiments, during a half press, the computer system hides other UI elements (removes selectable buttons). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a seventh set of criteria, the computer system ceases displaying, via the display generation component, a first set of one or more user interface objects (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6I-6J, where the computer system fades out user interface elements for controlling camera flash, toggling multi-frame photo capture, accessing additional settings, viewing recently captured media, switching between front- and back-facing cameras, and selecting a capture mode in response to a light / partial press) (e.g., selectable user interface objects, such as touch controls, and / or other display elements), wherein the seventh set of criteria includes the first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes the first detected intensity that exceeds the first threshold intensity, and a criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs is detected while displaying, via the display generation component, a user interface that includes the first set of one or more user interface objects. For example, while displaying a particular user interface, the computer system hides certain display elements / affordances of the user interface in response a light / partial press, providing a “quiet” mode for the user interface. In some embodiments, the first set of one or more user interface objects includes media capture user interface objects, such as captured media preview and / or capture setting controls (e.g., zoom, flash, and / or mode controls). In some embodiments, ceasing displaying the set of one or more user interface objects includes fading out one or more selectable user interface objects, e.g., by gradually increasing transparency, reducing contrast, and / or otherwise reducing their visual prominence. In some embodiments, ceasing displaying the set of one or more user interface objects includes animating one or more selectable user interface objects moving off of the display until no longer visible. In some embodiments, the computer system continues displaying the respective user interface without the set of one or more user interface objects (e.g., in the “quiet” mode) while the computer system is responsive to movement (e.g., when the computer system performs the first operation based on detected movements), and re- 1615614854 506Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 displays the hidden set of user interface objects in response to the inputs falling below a maintenance intensity threshold, ending or lifting off of the first input device, and / or exceeding the second threshold intensity. Hiding certain user interface objects of a user interface when an input meets the first criterion (e.g., in response to a light / partial press) provides users with real-time visual feedback about a state of the computer system, indicating to the user when a light / partial press state has been reached and allowing the user to quickly initiate control of the first operation (e.g., without checking for displayed feedback) or to end the input if control of the first operation is not immediately desired. Doing so also provides improved control and ergonomics of computer systems without cluttering a displayed user interface with additional controls, which makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), and, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, providing a “quiet” UI can help the user better observe the performance of the first operation (e.g., in response to movements detected after reaching the light / partial press state) and / or prepare to perform the second operation (e.g., by transitioning from a light / partial press to a hard / full press).

[0030] In some embodiments, during half press, the computer system displays additional UI elements (e.g., adds guides and capture information like histogram, level, grid). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies an eighth set of criteria, the computer system displays, via the display generation component, a second set of one or more user interface objects (e.g., selectable user interface objects, such as touch controls, and / or other display elements) in a respective user interface (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6I- 6J, where the computer system displays a settings adjustment UI element (e.g., zoom setting control), a capture guidance grid, and an image histogram in response to detecting a light / partial press), wherein the eighth set of criteria includes the first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes the first detected intensity that exceeds the first threshold intensity; and a criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs is detected while displaying, via the display generation component, the respective user interface. For example, while displaying a particular user interface, the computer system displays additional display elements / affordances for the user interface in response a light / partial press, for example, providing a “ready” mode for the user interface. In some 1615614854 507Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 embodiments, the second set of one or more user interface objects includes media capture user interface objects, such as a capture guidance grid, capture guidance alignment indicator, and / or image histogram (e.g., a color histogram and / or tonality curve for the current capture). In some embodiments, displaying the set of one or more user interface objects includes fading in one or more user interface objects, e.g., by gradually increasing opacity, increasing contrast, and / or otherwise increasing their visual prominence. In some embodiments, displaying the set of one or more user interface objects includes animating one or more selectable user interface objects moving onto the display. In some embodiments, the computer system continues displaying the user interface with the second set of one or more user interface objects (e.g., in the “ready” mode) while the computer system is responsive to movement (e.g., when the computer system performs the first operation based on detected movements), and hides the second set of user interface objects in response to the inputs falling below a maintenance intensity threshold, ending or lifting off of the first input device, and / or exceeding the second threshold intensity. Displaying additional user interface objects of a user interface when an input meets the first criterion (e.g., in response to a light / partial press) provides users with real-time visual feedback about a state of the computer system, indicating to the user when a light / partial press state has been reached and allowing the user to quickly initiate control of the first operation (e.g., without checking for displayed feedback) or to end the input if control of the first operation is not immediately desired. Doing so also provides improved control and ergonomics of computer systems without cluttering a displayed user interface with additional controls, which makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), and, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, the computer system can refrain from displaying certain user interface elements that are relevant to the first and / or second operation until the light / partial press state is reached (e.g., when the user is preparing to perform the first and / or second operation).

[0031] In some embodiments, when a control element is displayed, a tap adjusts the control in discrete increments (e.g., between zoom levels, modes, or filters). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that a first tap input included in the first set of one or more inputs is detected while displaying, via the display generation component, a user interface object corresponding 1615614854 508Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 to the first operation (e.g., a displayed control affordance or indicator for the first operation, such as a menu, slider, gauge, and / or wheel), the computer system performs the first operation based on the first tap input (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6O-6P), wherein performing the first operation based on the first tap input includes: in accordance with a determination that the first tap input is directed to a first region of the first input device (e.g., a tap on the upper, front, or left portion), changing a current settings value from an initial settings value to a first updated settings value selected from a predetermined set of settings values (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6O, where the computer system “skips” or “snaps” the zoom setting to the next preselected zoom value, 8.0x) (e.g., a set of available, preselected, and / or preferred values for a setting; In some embodiments, “snapping values” of an ordered sequence of settings values); and in accordance with a determination that the first tap input is directed to a second region of the first input device that is different from the first region of the first input device (e.g., a tap on the lower, back, or right portion), changing the current settings value from the initial settings value to a second updated settings value selected from the predetermined set of settings values (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6P, where the computer system “skips” or “snaps” the zoom setting to the next preselected zoom value, 2.0x), wherein the first updated settings value is different from the second updated settings value and a direction of change from the initial settings value to the first updated settings value is different from a direction of change from the initial settings value to the second updated settings value (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6O-6P, where the computer system snaps the zoom setting to the “next” preselected value based on the direction of the tap) (e.g., tapping on different portions of the first input device effects changes in different directions). For example, for a first operation of adjusting a camera zoom setting, in response to a tap detected in one region of the first input device, the computer system zooms in to the next designated zoom level, and in response to a tap detected in a different region of the first input device, the computer system zooms out to the next designated zoom level. As another example, for a first operation of selecting a camera filter, the computer system advances forward through the available filters in response to a tap detected in one region of the first input device and reverses backward through the available filters in response to a tap detected in the other region. In some embodiments, the first region and second region of the first input device are different regions of a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the first region and the second region of the first input device are regions with different hardware buttons and / or sensors (e.g., different operable regions of a compound button). In some embodiments, the user interface corresponding to the first operation is displayed in response 1615614854 509Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 to detecting a light / partial press (e.g., an input that satisfies the first criterion, e.g., exceeding the first threshold intensity). In some embodiments, the user interface corresponding to the first operation remains displayed until the input transitions into a full / hard press or until the first set of one or more inputs ends (e.g., until a lift-off event is detected or until a threshold period of time passes after a lift-off event without detecting subsequent inputs). Adjusting an operation setting in different directions in response to a tap input depending on where the tap input is detected provides improved control of computer system functionality without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also makes the user- system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, selecting from the predetermined settings values using tap inputs allows the user to adjust settings in a quick and intuitive manner without needing to display additional controls

[0032] In some embodiments, in response to detecting a contact on a control element, the computer system shows an indication on the display of the contact. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs, the computer system displays (e.g., initially displaying), via the display generation component, an indication of one or more characteristics (e.g., location and / or intensity) of the first set of one or more inputs (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6F-6I, where the computer system displays a “hint” indicator emerging from the edge of the display near the hardware button in response to the inputs detected via the hardware button). For example, the computer system displays an indication of an initial contact with the first input device, even before the contact resolves into a light / partial press (e.g., exceeds the first intensity threshold) or a full / hard press (e.g., exceeds the second intensity threshold). In some embodiments, the displayed indication is displayed near the first input device, e.g., at the edge of a display nearest to a hardware button. For example, the displayed indication may include a “cut out” displayed near the hardware button appearing as though the inputs were pushing the hardware button into the display. Displaying an indication of input characteristics in response to detected inputs provides users with real-time feedback about a state of the computer system, which assists the user with control of the computer system via the first input device. Doing so also makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), which, additionally, reduces power usage and 1615614854 510Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, the input indication shows a user that input is being detected, even if the input does not yet satisfy the criteria to perform the first or second operation, allowing the user to adjust the input if performance of the first or second operation is desired or to stop the input if not.

[0033] In some embodiments, the computer system shows an indication of where the contact is detected. In some embodiments, the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs include a location (e.g., a current location) of a detected input (e.g., a contact, such as a touch or press input) of the first set of one or more inputs (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6F-6H, the computer system animates the hint indicator moving to follow the location of the user’s finger on the hardware button along the edge of the display). For example, the computer system displays the indication particular visual characteristics (e.g., location, size, shape, color, and / or transparency) based on where (or in which region) contact is detected via the first input device. For example, the computer system displays the indication near the first input device, and moves the indication relative to the first input device (e.g., moving along the edge of the display parallel to the first input device) as the input moves along the first input device. Visually indicating a location of a detected input provides users with real-time feedback about a state of the computer system, which assists the user with control of the computer system via the first input device. Doing so also makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, indicating the location of an input orients the user with respect to the first input device, preparing the user to provide movement inputs to control the first operation.

[0034] In some embodiments, the computer system shows an indication of an intensity of the contact. In some embodiments, the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs include an intensity (e.g., a current intensity) of a detected input of the first set of one or more inputs (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6F-6I, where the computer system animates the hint indicator growing as input intensity increases, e.g., from hardware button state (B) to (C) to (D)). For example, the computer system displays the indication with particular visual characteristics (e.g., location, size, shape, color, and / or transparency) based on how much or how hard the user is pressing the first input device. For example, the computer system 1615614854 511Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 increases the size of the indication as intensity increases and decreases the size of the indication as intensity decreases, e.g., displaying the indication at its smallest size when the input is resting on the first input device without pressing and displaying the indication at its largest size as the input intensity reaches the first intensity threshold. For example, the computer system displays the indication as a round bump when the input is resting on the first input device without pressing and displays the indication as a wide tab (e.g., morphing into a displayed control corresponding to the first operation). Visually indicating an intensity of a detected input provides users with real-time feedback about a state of the computer system, which assists the user with control of the computer system via the first input device. Doing so also makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, indicating the intensity of an input helps the user know to increase the intensity if performance of the first or second operation is desired or to decrease the intensity (and / or end the input) if performance of the first or second operation is not desired.

[0035] In some embodiments, the indication changes in appearance as one or more parameters of the contact change (e.g., intensity and / or location). In some embodiments, while displaying the indication of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs, the computer system detects a change to at least one of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs (e.g., a change in location and / or intensity), and in response to detecting the change to at least one of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs, the computer system changes (e.g., based on the change to the input characteristics) an appearance (e.g., visual characteristics of the indication, such as location, size, shape, color, and / or transparency) of the indication of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS. 6F-6I, the computer system animates the hint indicator moving and growing as the user moves the finger and increases the press intensity). For example, the computer system moves the indication on the display to reflect movement of the input across the first input device. For example, the computer system grows, shrinks, warps, or changes the visual prominence of the indication to reflect changes to the intensity, e.g., as the applied intensity approaches or retreats from the first threshold intensity. Visually indicating a change to the characteristics of a detected input provides users with real-time feedback about a state of the computer 1615614854 512Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 system, which assists the user with control of the computer system via the first input device. Doing so also makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, visually indicating changes to the characteristics of an input indicates how the user can control the first input device, e.g., visually indicating that the computer system can detect and respond to changes in location and intensity, and allows the user to adjust the characteristics of the input to achieve an intended effect.

[0036] In some embodiments, the indication expands into a control feedback object when the first threshold is reached. In some embodiments, while displaying the indication of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a tenth set of criteria, the computer system displays the indication of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs morphing (e.g., changing location, size, shape, color, and / or transparency) into a respective user interface object corresponding to the first operation (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6I-6J, where the hint indicator expands into a zoom control UI element) (e.g., a displayed control affordance or indicator for the first operation, such as a menu, slider, gauge, and / or wheel), wherein the tenth set of criteria includes the first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes the first detected intensity that exceeds the first threshold intensity. For example, before the input reaches the first threshold intensity, the computer system displays the indicator as a small bump extending from the edge of the display near the first input device, then displays the indicator expanding into a wide tab with control information for the first operation once the first criterion is met. In some embodiments, the tenth set of criteria includes a criterion that is met when the intensity of the input does not exceed the second threshold intensity for at least a threshold period of time after satisfying the first criterion, e.g., the computer system does not display the indication morphing into the control object in response to a quick full / hard press. Displaying an indication of one or more input characteristics that morphs into a user interface object corresponding to the first operation when the input transitions to a light / partial press provides users with real-time feedback about a state of the computer system, which assists the user with control of the computer system via the first input device. Doing so also makes the user- system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and 1615614854 513Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, visually indicating changes to the characteristics of an input indicates how the user can control the first input device, e.g., visually indicating that the computer system can detect and respond to changes in location and intensity, and allows the user to adjust the characteristics of the input to achieve an intended result.

[0037] In some embodiments, the computer system display a UI control feedback object in response to the press input, and adjusts the UI control feedback object in response to the movement (e.g., as further described with respect to FIGS.14A-14S). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies an eleventh set of criteria, the computer system displays, via the display generation component, a user interface object corresponding to the first operation (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6I-6J and / or 6T, where the zoom control UI element is displayed in response to the light / partial presses on the hardware button) (e.g., a displayed control affordance or indicator controlled by the first operation, such as a menu, slider, gauge, and / or wheel), wherein the eleventh set of criteria includes the first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes the first detected intensity that exceeds the first threshold intensity; and performing the first operation includes adjusting the user interface object (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K- 6P, 6U-6W, and 6AA-6AI, where the control element adjusted in response to movement on the button or touch-sensitive display) (e.g., changing an appearance of the user interface object to indicate a result of the first operation).

[0038] In some embodiments, while a UI control feedback object that responds to movement is not displayed, the computer system detects a movement input over the control element, and if it includes more than a threshold amount of movement, the computer system displays the UI control feedback object (if it includes less than the threshold amount of movement, the computer system does not display the UI control feedback object) (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 6G, if the computer system detects that the lateral movement of the finger along the hardware button exceeds a threshold distance, such as the entire length of the hardware button, the computer system displays the zoom control UI element as illustrated in FIG.6J, e.g., alternatively to displaying the zoom control UI element in response to a light / partial press). In some embodiments, while the user interface object corresponding to the first operation is not displayed and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs 1615614854 514Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 includes a movement input that exceeds a threshold amount of movement, the computer system displays the user interface object corresponding to the first operation. In some embodiments, while the user interface object corresponding to the first operation is not displayed and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs does not include a movement input that exceeds the threshold amount of movement, the computer system foregoes displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6Y).

[0039] In some embodiments, the UI control feedback object is dismissed after no interaction for a threshold amount of time. In some embodiments, while displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation, the computer system detects a lift-off event, and in response to detecting the lift-off event and in accordance with a determination that a subsequent input is not detected, via the first input device, within a threshold period of time after detecting the lift-off event, the computer system ceases displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6W-6X, where the computer system displays the zoom control UI element for a short period after the finger lifts off at 6W-1, then ceases displaying the zoom control UI element at FIG.6X as no further inputs are detected via the hardware button and / or directed to the zoom control UI element on the touch-sensitive surface of the display).

[0040] In some embodiments, the UI control feedback object dismissed (e.g., before the threshold amount of time has elapsed) in response to a dismiss input (e.g., a tap outside of the control or a swipe over the control toward an edge of the display). In some embodiments, while displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation, the computer system detects (in some embodiments, via the first input device; In some embodiments, via another input device) a second set of one or more inputs (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6Q, where the computer system detects a tap on the touch-sensitive surface of the display in a region outside of the zoom control UI element and / or a swipe on the touch-sensitive surface of the display that swipes over the zoom control UI element towards the edge of the display); and in response to detecting the second set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the second set of one or more inputs corresponds to a request to dismiss the user interface object corresponding to the first operation, the computer system ceases displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6R). In some embodiments, the second set of one or more inputs corresponds to a request to dismiss the user interface object if it includes a tap directed to a location outside of 1615614854 515Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 the display region of the user interface object (e.g., on a touch sensitive display). In some embodiments, the second set of one or more inputs corresponds to a request to dismiss the user interface object if it includes a swipe across the user interface object towards an edge of the display, e.g., swiping from the interior of the display, across the user interface object, and off the edge of the display.

[0041] In some embodiments, the UI control feedback object is displayed at different locations in the UI based on an orientation of the device (e.g., always near the control element) (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6J-1, where the zoom control UI element is displayed near the hardware button regardless of orientation). In some embodiments, displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation includes, in accordance with a determination that a physical orientation of the computer system is in a first state, displaying the user interface object at a first location within a respective user interface, and in accordance with a determination that the physical orientation of the computer system is in a second state different from the first state, displaying the user interface object at a second location, different from the first location, within the respective user interface.

[0042] In some embodiments, displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation includes, while a physical orientation of the computer system is in a first state, displaying the user interface object at a first location within a respective user interface (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6K, where the zoom control UI element is displayed near the top of the camera preview in the camera user interface). In some embodiments, the computer system detects the physical orientation of the computer system changing to a second state different from the first state, and in response to detecting the physical orientation of the computer system changing to the second state, the computer system displays the user interface object at a second location, different from the first location, within the respective user interface (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6T, where the zoom control UI element is displayed at the bottom of the camera preview in the camera user interface).

[0043] In some embodiments, the UI control feedback element changes based on orientation of the device (e.g., display selectable options or zoom control in different order depending on an orientation of the device). In some embodiments, displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation includes, while a physical orientation of the computer system is in a first state, displaying one or more elements of the user interface object in a first configuration within a respective user interface (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6K, where the zoom control UI element is displayed near the top of the camera preview in the camera user 1615614854 516Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 interface). In some embodiments, the computer system detects the physical orientation of the computer system changing to a second state different from the first state, and in response to detecting the physical orientation of the computer system changing to the second state, the computer system displays the or more elements of the user interface object in a second configuration, different from the first configuration, within the respective user interface (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.6T, where the zoom control UI element is displayed at the bottom of the camera preview in the camera user interface).

[0044] In some embodiments, the UI control feedback object can be directly manipulated (e.g., with taps or swipes on the UI control feedback object). In some embodiments, while displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation, the computer system detects (e.g., via a touch sensitive display that is displaying the user interface object) a third set of one or more inputs including an input directed to a display location of the user interface object (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6K-6K-1, 6M-6M1, 6O-6P, and / or 6AA-6AI, where the computer system detects inputs directed to the location of the control UI elements on the touch-sensitive surface of the display) (e.g., a swipe, flick, drag, tap, and / or press on the user interface object). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the third set of one or more inputs, the computer system performs the first operation based on the input directed to the display location of the user interface object (e.g., as illustrated by the settings adjustments made in response to the inputs on the touch-sensitive surface of the display in FIGS.6K-6K- 1, 6M-6M1, 6O-6P, and / or 6AA-6AI) (e.g., based on the location, direction of movement, magnitude of movement, and / or speed of movement of the input to the user interface object). For example, in computer systems where the first input device includes a hardware button or sensor separate from a touch-sensitive display, the computer system performs the first operation in response to light / partial press inputs with movement detected via the hardware button / sensor and in response to inputs manipulating the user interface object via the touch- sensitive display.

[0045] In some embodiments, for movement in a respective direction, the direction of the first operation changes based on an orientation of the device (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6L- 6M, where a leftward movement adjusts the zoom down from 8x to 2.8x, compared to FIGS. 6T-6U, where a leftward movement adjusts the zoom up from 2x to 3.4x). In some embodiments, performing the first operation includes, while a physical orientation of the computer system is in a first state and in accordance with a determination that a movement input included in the first set of one or more inputs moves in a first direction (in some 1615614854 517Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 embodiments, relative to a user interface in which the UI object is displayed; In some embodiments, relative to the first input device; In some embodiments, relative to the computer system), the computer system changes a current settings value from an initial settings value to a first updated settings value; and in accordance with a determination that a movement input included in the first set of one or more inputs moves in a second direction different from the first direction, the computer system changes the current settings value from the initial settings value to a second updated settings value, wherein the first updated settings value is different from the second updated settings value and a direction of change from the initial settings value to the first updated settings value is different from a direction of change from the initial settings value to the second updated settings value.

[0046] The following is a description of a method for controlling a computer system based on variable characteristics of hardware inputs, in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, and / or 600) that is in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a display controller; a touch- sensitive display system; a display (e.g., integrated and / or connected), a 3D display, a transparent display, a projector, and / or a heads-up display), one or more cameras (e.g., one or more rear (user-facing) cameras and / or one or more forward (environment-facing) cameras. In some embodiments, the one or more cameras include one or more cameras with different lenses / lens types, such as a standard camera, a telephoto camera, and / or a wide-angle camera), and a first input device (e.g., including one or more hardware buttons and / or surfaces, such as mechanical (e.g., physically depressible), solid-state, intensity-sensitive, and / or touch-sensitive (e.g., capacitive) buttons and / or surfaces), e.g., as illustrated in FIGS. 6A-6B. In some embodiments, the first input device is included in a plurality of input devices in communication with the computer system) (in some embodiments, the computer system is optionally in communication with one or more sensors, such as camera sensors, optical sensors, depth sensors, capacitive sensors, intensity sensors, motion sensors, vibration sensors, and / or audio sensors.

[0047] As described herein, this method provides intuitive control of media capture operations based on variable characteristics of hardware inputs in accordance with some embodiments. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for operating computer system operations, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery- operated computing devices, enabling a user to operate a computer system faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 1615614854 518Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501

[0048] The computer system detects, via the first input device, a first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device (e.g., as illustrated by the press and swipe movements shown in FIGS.8A-8P) (e.g., a press, tap, click, swipe, and / or other manipulation of the first input device). In response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs (in some embodiments, a single input; In some embodiments, a single continuous contact with the first input device that includes multiple component inputs, such as a press, followed by movement) and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a first set of criteria, the computer system captures, via the one or more cameras, first photo media (in some embodiments, the first photo media includes still (e.g., single-frame) photo media. In some embodiments, the first photo media includes photo media with a limited (e.g., 0.5s, 1s, 3s, and / or 5s) duration, such as a multi-frame capture that includes content (e.g., frames) from before and / or after a capture input is detected, creating a “live” effect. In some embodiments, the first photo media includes one or more images (e.g., frames) that are displayed in sequence, such as a media item that saved in the graphical interface file format. In some embodiments, the first photo media includes spatial media content such as depth information), wherein the first set of criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes press input of a first type (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8A-8B and 8M-8N, where photo media is captured in response to quick press-and-release inputs via the hardware button) (in some embodiments, the press input of the first type is a hard / full press input, e.g., a detected contact that applies at least a threshold intensity and / or depresses a mechanical input device at least a threshold amount. In some embodiments, the press input of the first type is a short press input, where the press is released and / or lifted off within a threshold amount of time (e.g., 0.1s, 0.6s, 1s, or 1.5s) after initially registering). In response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a second set of criteria, the computer system captures, via the one or more cameras, first video media (in some embodiments, the first video media includes spatial media content such as depth information), wherein the second set of criteria includes a second criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a press input of a second type different from the first type (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8C-8E and 8H-8I, where video media is captured in response to held press inputs via the hardware button). In some embodiments, a press input of the second type is a hard / full press input, e.g., a detected contact that applies at least the threshold intensity and / or depresses a mechanical input device at least the threshold amount. In some embodiments, the press input of the second type is a long / held press input, where the 1615614854 519Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 contact is maintained for over the threshold amount of time (e.g., 0.1s, 0.6s, 1s, or 1.5s) after initially registering. In some embodiments, a detected contact is maintained (e.g., continues to register) until the contact intensity falls below the hard / full threshold intensity and / or ceases to depress the mechanical input device to at least the threshold amount. In some embodiments, a detected contact is maintained until the contact intensity falls below a lower threshold intensity than the hard / full threshold and / or ceases to depress the mechanical input device to a less-depressed threshold amount. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first input includes the second type of press input different from the first type of press input, the computer system discards photo media captured in response to detecting the first input.

[0049] While capturing the first video media, the computer system detects an end of the first set of one or more inputs (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8G and 8L, where the finger is released / lifted off of the hardware button). In some embodiments detecting the end of the first input includes detecting a lift-off of an input element ( e.g., a user’s finger or a stylus) from the first input device. In some embodiments, detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs includes detecting the detected intensity of the one or more inputs falling below a maintenance threshold intensity and / or ceasing to depress the mechanical input device to at least the threshold amount. In some embodiments, detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs includes determining that movement of the first set of one or more inputs has not been detected for at least a threshold period of time. In response to detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs included a movement of a first type (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8I-8K, where the movement input swipes a threshold distance along the hardware button) (in some embodiments, a movement of the first type includes a movement detected after detecting the second type of press input, e.g., the movement of the first type includes a movement detected after the press has been maintained for over the threshold amount of time. In some embodiments, a movement of the first type includes a movement detected prior to detecting the cessation of the first set of one or more inputs. In some embodiments, a movement of the first type includes a movement detected while the first set of one or more inputs includes a detected contact of at least a threshold intensity, e.g., the movement of the first type includes a movement detected while detecting at least the hard / full threshold intensity and / or the maintenance threshold intensity. In some embodiments, a movement of the first type includes a movement component perpendicular to the direction of contact intensity, such as 1615614854 520Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 swiping, scrolling, sliding, and / or rotating movements / gestures across, over, and / or around a surface of the first input device. In some embodiments, a movement of the first type includes a movement of at least a threshold distance / length, e.g., 0.1mm, 1 mm, 2.5mm, or 1cm. In some embodiments, a movement of the first type includes a movement in a particular direction, e.g., down, up, left, and / or right. In some embodiments, the particular direction is based on the orientation of media capture. For example, when capturing in portrait orientation, the first set of one or more inputs includes a movement of the first type if it includes a downwards movement, and when capturing in a landscape orientation, the first set of one or more inputs includes a movement of the first type if it includes a leftwards movement), the computer system continues to capture the first video media after detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.8L). For example, if a movement of the first type (e.g., a downwards / leftwards swipe) was detected subsequent to the second type of press input (e.g., a long / held press), the video capture is a persistent capture that continues after the press is released. E.g., a user can lock an initiated video capture using the movement of the first type). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first input does not include a movement of a first type, the computer system ceases capturing the video media. For example, if a movement of the first type (e.g., a downwards / leftwards swipe) was not detected prior to the release of the press input, the video capture is a temporary capture that stops when the press is released. For example, the user can capture “quick-take” video without locking the initiated video capture with the movement of the first type. Conditionally performing different types of media captures, and in particular, a photo media capture, a persistent video capture, or a temporary video capture, based on input type and input movement, provides improved control of computer system functionality without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also assists the user with composing media capture events and reduces the risk that transient media capture opportunities are missed or captured with unintended settings, which enhances the operability of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, a user can quickly and easily capture a photo, capture video, end video capture, and / or “lock” the capture of video (e.g., switch to a persistent video capture mode) all via the first input device, without the computer system needing to detect additional inputs, wait for the user to navigate between different user interface elements or input devices 1615614854 521Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 (e.g., a hardware button and a touch-sensitive display), and / or display additional dedicated user interface elements for controlling the media capture type. Doing so also provides improved ergonomics of computer systems, for example, by expanding the controls available using a particular input device and reducing the need for users to move their hands back and forth between different user interface elements and / or input devices, blocking the user’s view or distracting the user from transient media capture opportunities.

[0050] In some embodiments, a still photo is captured based on a press and release without lifting off (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.8B, where the press input may remain in hardware button state (B) following the press input in FIG.8A to capture a photo). In some embodiments, the first set of one or more inputs includes the press input of the first type when the first set of inputs includes a first intensity, detected (e.g., via the first input device) at a first time, that exceeds a first threshold intensity (e.g., as illustrated by the press to hardware button state (E)). For example, the first threshold intensity corresponds to a press activation threshold (e.g., the intensity at which an input is registered as a press) or a hard / full press threshold. In some embodiments, the first threshold intensity includes a force or pressure threshold, e.g., 75 g / cm3, 100 g / cm3, or 150 g / cm3. In some embodiments, the first threshold intensity includes a threshold mechanical state corresponding to the first threshold intensity, e.g., detecting physical depression of a mechanical button to a “full” press state as a substitute measurement for force / pressure. In some embodiments, the first set of one or more inputs includes the press input of the first type when the first set of inputs includes a second intensity, detected (e.g., via the first input device) at a second time after the first time, that does not exceed a second threshold intensity that is lower than the first threshold intensity (e.g., as illustrated by the press transitioning to hardware button state (B) in FIG.8B). For example, the computer system captures the first photo media in response to a press and release without fully lifting off of the first input device. For example, the second threshold intensity corresponds to a press release threshold, e.g., the intensity at which the input is no longer registered as a press. In some embodiments, the second threshold intensity includes a force or pressure threshold, e.g., 15 g / cm3, 25 g / cm3, or 36 g / cm3. In some embodiments, second first threshold intensity includes a threshold mechanical state corresponding to the second threshold intensity, e.g., detecting physical depression of a mechanical button as a substitute measurement for force / pressure. In some embodiments, the second time is less than a threshold period of time (e.g., 0.1s, 0.6s, 1s, or 1.5s) after the first time, e.g., the press input of the first type is a quick press-and-release. Conditionally performing a photo capture 1615614854 522Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in response to a press-and-release input provides improved control of computer system functionality without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also assists the user with composing media capture events and reduces the risk that transient media capture opportunities are missed or captured with unintended settings, which enhances the operability and ergonomics of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, a user can quickly and easily capture a photo via the first input device, without the computer system needing to detect additional inputs, wait for the user to navigate between different user interface elements or input devices (e.g., a hardware button and a touch-sensitive display), and / or display additional dedicated user interface elements for controlling the media capture type. Doing so also provides improved ergonomics of computer systems, for example, by reducing the need for users to move their hands back and forth between different user interface elements and / or input devices, which can block the user’s view of or distract the user from transient media capture opportunities.

[0051] In some embodiments, the press input of the first type includes a respective press input with a respective detected intensity that falls below a first threshold intensity (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.8B) (e.g., a release threshold, e.g., 15 g / cm3, 25 g / cm3, or 36 g / cm3and / or a corresponding mechanical state) within a first threshold period of time (e.g., a “quick” press threshold, e.g., 0.1s, 0.6s, 1s, or 1.5s) after the respective press input is initially detected (e.g., after initially detecting the press at FIG.8A). For example, the computer system captures the first photo media in response to a quick press-and-release, e.g., without a full lift-off. In some embodiments, the computer system initially detects the respective press input when an intensity greater than a threshold intensity (e.g., a press activation threshold or a hard / full press threshold, e.g., 75 g / cm3, 100 g / cm3, or 150 g / cm3and / or a corresponding mechanical state) is detected. For example, a press input of the first type (e.g., a short press input) can follow a prolonged light / partial press as long as the press is quickly released after transitioning into a hard / full press. Conditionally performing a photo capture in response to a quick press-and-release input provides improved control of computer system functionality without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also assists the user with composing media capture events and reduces the risk that transient media capture opportunities are missed or captured with unintended settings, which enhances the 1615614854 523Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 operability and ergonomics of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, a user can quickly and easily capture a photo via a short press of the first input device, without the computer system needing to detect additional inputs, wait for the user to navigate between different user interface elements or input devices (e.g., a hardware button and a touch-sensitive display), and / or display additional dedicated user interface elements for controlling media capture. Doing so also provides improved ergonomics of computer systems, for example, by reducing the need for users to move their hands back and forth between different user interface elements and / or input devices to select and perform a photo media capture, which can block the user’s view of or distract the user from transient media capture opportunities.

[0052] In some embodiments, a still photo is captured on a press and liftoff (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8B and / or 8N, where the press input lifts off entirely following the press inputs in FIGS.8A and / or 8M to capture a photo). In some embodiments, the press input of the first type includes a respective press input that lifts off of the first input device (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8B and / or 8N) within a second threshold period of time (e.g., a “quick” press threshold, e.g., 0.1s, 0.6s, 1s, or 1.5s; In some embodiments, the second threshold period of time is the same as the first threshold period of time) after initially detecting the respective press input (e.g., after initially detecting the press at FIGS.8A and / or 8M). For example, the computer system captures the first photo media in response to a quick press- and-lift. In some embodiments, the computer system initially detects the respective press input when an intensity greater than a second threshold intensity (e.g., a press activation threshold or a hard / full press threshold, e.g., 75 g / cm3, 100 g / cm3, or 150 g / cm3and / or a corresponding mechanical state) is detected. In some embodiments, the respective press input of the first set of one or more inputs lifts off of the first input device when the respective press input is no longer detected via one or more sensors of the first input device, e.g., intensity sensors, capacitive sensors, and / or mechanical sensors. Conditionally performing a photo capture in response to a quick press-and-lift input provides improved control of computer system functionality without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also assists the user with composing media capture events and reduces the risk that transient media capture opportunities are missed or captured with 1615614854 524Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 unintended settings, which enhances the operability and ergonomics of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, a user can quickly and easily capture a photo via a short press of the first input device, without the computer system needing to detect additional inputs, wait for the user to navigate between different user interface elements or input devices (e.g., a hardware button and a touch-sensitive display), and / or display additional dedicated user interface elements for controlling media capture. Doing so also provides improved ergonomics of computer systems, for example, by reducing the need for users to move their hands back and forth between different user interface elements and / or input devices to select and perform a photo media capture, which can block the user’s view of or distract the user from transient media capture opportunities.

[0053] In some embodiments, a temporary video that ends in response to detecting the end of the sequence of one or more inputs is captured on a long press without movement (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8E-8G, where the video capture ends when the input is lifted off of the hardware button). In some embodiments, the press input of the second type includes a respective press input with a respective detected intensity that does not fall below a second threshold intensity (e.g., a release threshold, e.g., 25 g / cm3, 36 g / cm3, or 50 g / cm3and / or a corresponding mechanical state) within a third threshold period of time (e.g., a “held” or “long” press threshold, e.g., 0.1s, 0.6s, 1s, or 1.5s; In some embodiments, the third threshold period of time is the same as the first threshold period of time and / or the second threshold period of time) after initially detecting the respective press input (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS. 8C-8F and / or 8H-8K), showing a press input is maintained on the hardware button). For example, the computer system captures the first video media in response to a long / held press, e.g., a press that is not quickly released and / or lifted off. In some embodiments, the computer system initially detects the respective press input when an intensity greater than a second threshold intensity (e.g., a press activation threshold or a hard / full press threshold, e.g., 75 g / cm3, 100 g / cm3, or 150 g / cm3and / or a corresponding mechanical state) is detected. For example, a light / partial press is not registered as the second type of press (e.g., a held / long press) even if the light / partial press is held for more than the third threshold period of time. Providing video capture in response to a held / long press input where the video capture ends when the input ends unless a movement of the first type is included in the input provides 1615614854 525Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 improved control of computer system functionality without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also assists the user with composing media capture events and reduces the risk that transient media capture opportunities are missed or captured with unintended settings, which enhances the operability and ergonomics of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, a user can quickly and easily capture a video of the desired duration simply by holding a press input to initiate capture and releasing the press input to end capture, reducing the need for users to move their hands back and forth between different user interface elements and / or input devices to select, initiate, and / or end a video media capture, which can block the user’s view of or distract the user from transient media capture opportunities.

[0054] In some embodiments, persistent video is captured on a long press with subsequent movement (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8H-8L, where, following a swipe of a threshold distance (FIGS.8I-8K), the computer system continues capturing video at FIG.8L even after the input lifts off of the hardware button). In some embodiments, the press input of the second type includes a respective press input with a respective detected intensity that does not fall below a third threshold intensity (e.g., a release threshold, e.g., 25 g / cm3, 36 g / cm3, or 50 g / cm3and / or a corresponding mechanical state) within a fourth threshold period of time (e.g., a “held” or “long” press threshold, e.g., 0.1s, 0.6s, 1s, or 1.5s; In some embodiments, the third threshold period of time is the same as the first threshold period of time and / or the second threshold period of time) after initially detecting the respective press input (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8C-8F and / or 8H-8K). For example, the computer system captures the first video media in response to a long / held press, e.g., a press that is not quickly released and / or lifted off. In some embodiments, the computer system initially detects the respective press input when an intensity greater than a second threshold intensity (e.g., a press activation threshold or a hard / full press threshold, e.g., 75 g / cm3, 100 g / cm3, or 150 g / cm3and / or a corresponding mechanical state) is detected. For example, a light / partial press is not registered as the second type of press (e.g., a held / long press) even if the light / partial press is held for more than the fourth threshold period of time.

[0055] In some embodiments, the movement of the first type includes a respective movement (e.g., a swipe, drag, scroll, slide, and / or other gesture) detected (e.g., via the first input 1615614854 526Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 device) more than the fourth threshold period of time after initially detecting the respective press input (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8I-8K, where the input is swiped a threshold distance after video capture has been initiated). For example, the computer system continues to capture the first video media after detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs if movement is detected after to the respective press input resolves into a held / long press. For example, while capturing video in response to a held / long press of the first input device, the user swipes the first input device to lock the capture. In some embodiments, the respective movement is detected before the detected intensity falls below the third threshold intensity and / or before detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs. Providing persistent video capture in response to a held / long press input with subsequent movement provides improved control of computer system functionality without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls. Doing so also assists the user with composing media capture events and reduces the risk that transient media capture opportunities are missed or captured with unintended settings, which enhances the operability and ergonomics of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the system) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the system by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. For example, after initiating a video capture with a held / long press of the first input device, the user can easily lock the video capture (e.g., to continue capturing without holding the first input device) via a swipe (e.g., or other movement) of the first input device, without inadvertently ending the video capture.

[0056] In some embodiments, the movement is detected on the hardware input element (e.g., a swipe to the side in a direction indicated by a graphical indicator) (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8F and 8J, where the computer system detects lateral movement across the surface of the hardware button).

[0057] In some embodiments, the movement is detected on a touch-sensitive display (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8F and 8J by the swipe movement on the touch-sensitive surface of the display).

[0058] In some embodiments, the computer system displays graphical indicator to prompt additional movement (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8D-8F and / or 8I-8K by the displayed lock indicator element). In some embodiments, the graphical indicator is displayed near the hardware input element (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8D-8F and / or 8I-8K, where the lock indicator element is displayed at the edge of the display near the hardware button). In some 1615614854 527Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 embodiments, the graphical indicator indicates direction of movement to lock video capture (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8E-8F and / or 8I-8K, where the lock indicator element includes an arrow pointing in the direction of swipe used to lock the video capture). In some embodiments, the graphical indicator responds to movement to indicate progress toward reaching a threshold amount of movement (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8F and / or 8J-8K, where a lock icon of the lock indicator element moves along the arrow towards an end point, following the movement of the swipe input). In some embodiments, the computer system ceases to display visual indicator when video capture is locked (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.8L, after the swipe inputs reach the threshold distance).

[0059] In some embodiments, while an input is maintained on the hardware, an input element shows a hint of change to video capture mode (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.8D, where some elements of the camera user interface begin to fade out, the aspect ratio of the camera preview begins to expand, the software capture button changing, and the lock indicator element emerges as the user holds a press input on the hardware button). In some embodiments, the computer system reverses the change if the press input reverses (e.g., intensity decreases) (e.g., if the user released the held press input before reaching the state shown in FIG.8E, the computer system would revert display of the camera user interface to the state illustrated in FIG.8C). In some embodiments, the computer system changes a mode selector (e.g., as illustrated by the capture mode selector fading out in FIG.8D as the press input is held). In some embodiments, the computer system changes a software capture affordance (e.g., software shutter button) (e.g., as illustrated by the software capture button of FIG.8C morphing into a video-specific software capture button in FIGS.8D-8E as the press input is held). In some embodiments, the computer system changes an aspect ratio of live preview (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8C-8E, where the aspect ratio of the camera preview expands from the photo aspect ratio shown in FIG.8C to the video aspect ratio shown in FIG. 8E as the press input is held).

[0060] In some embodiments, the mode for video capture depends on currently selected mode for still capture (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8A-8G, where standard video is captured in response to a held press detected while in a standard photo mode, in contrast to FIGS.8H-8P, where cinematic video is captured in response to a held press detected while in a portrait capture mode). In some embodiments, the computer system uses standard video mode when standard camera mode is selected (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8A-8G). In some 1615614854 528Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 embodiments, the computer system uses cinematic mode when portrait camera mode is selected (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8H-8P).

[0061] In some embodiments, pressing the button while not in camera app launches camera app (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6C-6D and 10A-10B, where the camera application is launched in response to a press of the hardware button detected while displaying a video player application).

[0062] In some embodiments, while video capture is locked (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8K- 8O), the computer system detects a subsequent press input (with or without liftoff) to take a still photo while capturing video (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8M-8N, where a photo capture is performed (e.g., FIG.8N) in response to a press input during video capture (e.g., FIG.8M).

[0063] In some embodiments, while video capture is locked (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8K- 8O), the computer system detects a subsequent press input (with or without liftoff) to stop capturing video (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.8O-8P, where the video capture is ended at FIG. 8P in response to a press on the hardware button in FIG.8O).

[0064] The following is a description of a method for customizing and controlling operations of a computer system using hardware inputs, in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, and / or 600) that is in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a display controller; a touch- sensitive display system; a display (e.g., integrated and / or connected), a 3D display, a transparent display, a projector, and / or a heads-up display) and a first input device (e.g., including one or more hardware buttons and / or surfaces, such as mechanical (e.g., physically depressible), solid-state, intensity-sensitive, and / or touch-sensitive (e.g., capacitive) buttons and / or surfaces), e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6A-6B. In some embodiments, the first input device is included in a plurality of input devices in communication with the computer system.) (in some embodiments, the computer system is optionally in communication with one or more cameras, such as a rear (user-facing) camera and a forward (environment-facing) camera and / or a plurality of cameras with different lenses, such as a standard camera, a telephoto camera, and / or a wide-angle camera. In some embodiments, the computer system is optionally in communication with one or more sensors, such as camera sensors, optical sensors, depth sensors, capacitive sensors, intensity sensors, motion sensors, vibration sensors, and / or audio sensors. 1615614854 529Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501

[0065] As described herein, this method provides intuitive customization and control of operations of a computer system using hardware inputs in accordance with some embodiments. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for operating computer system operations, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery- operated computing devices, enabling a user to operate a computer system faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[0066] The computer system detects (e.g., via the first input device and / or via a second input device, such as a touch-sensitive surface located adjacent to the first input device) a first input including a movement (e.g., a swipe gesture) that starts at a first location corresponding to the first input device (e.g., an edge / region of a touch sensitive surface close to where the first input device (e.g., hardware button) is situated) (in some embodiments, the display generation component is a touch-sensitive display and the first input is detected on a region of the display that corresponds to and / or is adjacent to the first input device) and ends at a second location that is different from the first location (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10B, 10K, and / or 10R, where the computer system detects a swipe input via the touch-sensitive surface of the display that moves from an edge of the display near the hardware button inwards towards the center of the display) (e.g., an gesture input swiping from the first input device inwards towards the center of the touch sensitive surface). In some embodiments, the second location is farther from the first input device than the first location, e.g., the movement includes an inward swipe from the edge of the touch-sensitive display closest to the hardware button towards the center of the touch-sensitive display.

[0067] In response to detecting the first input (in some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first input includes the movement), the computer system displays, via the display generation component, an option user interface (e.g., a menu with controls for selecting / changing a customizable function of the first input device (e.g., the hardware button)) including one or more selectable user interface objects corresponding to one or more respective operations that can be associated with the input device (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS. 10C-10D, 10L, and / or 10S, where the computer system displays a menu of settings that can be associated with (e.g., controlled by) the hardware button as described with respect to FIGS.6A-6AI, such as zoom, exposure, simulated depth-of-field, focus, filter, and / or capture guidance settings) (e.g., the one or more respective operations are operations that can be associated with the first input device, such as operations for changing a zoom level, simulated depth-of-field setting, exposure setting, filter setting, and / or capture guidance setting); In 1615614854 530Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 some embodiments, the options user interface is displayed overlaying (e.g., semi- transparently and / or opaquely) a user interface displayed when the first input is detected.

[0068] While displaying the options user interface, the computer system detects (in some embodiments, via the second input device) a second input (in some embodiments, a tap input) selecting a respective selectable user interface object of the one or more selectable user interface objects (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS. FIGS.10C-10D, 10L, and / or 10S, where the computer system detects tap and / or swipe inputs directed to the menu of settings that select settings to associate with the hardware button). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input, the computer system associates the respective operation that corresponds to the selected user interface object with the first input device.

[0069] After detecting the second input (e.g., and without detecting a subsequent input selecting one of the one or more selectable user interface objects from the option user interface, e.g., while the respective selectable user interface object is the most recently selected user interface object from the options user interface), the computer system detects, via the first input device, a third input directed to the first input device (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10G, 10J, 10N, 10O, 10Q, and / or 10T, where the computer system detects inputs directed to the hardware button and / or touch-sensitive surface of the display, such as light / partial presses accompanied by movement as described with respect to FIGS.6A-6AI) (e.g., a press, tap, click, swipe, and / or other manipulation of the first input device).

[0070] In response to detecting the third input directed to the first input device and in accordance with a determination that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, the computer system performs a first operation of the one or more respective operations, wherein the first set of one or more criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective selectable user interface object that was selected by the second input (e.g., the most recently selected user interface object from the options user interface) corresponds to the first operation (in some embodiments, the first criterion is satisfied if the first operation is currently (e.g., remains) associated with the first hardware button). In response to detecting the third input directed to the first input device and in accordance with a determination that a second set of one or more criteria is satisfied, performing a second operation of the one or more respective operations, wherein the second set of one or more criteria includes a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective selectable user interface object that was selected by the second input corresponds to the second operation. For example, as illustrated in FIGS. 10C-10J and 10S-10T, after selecting to associate the exposure setting with the hardware 1615614854 531Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 button, the computer system adjusts the exposure setting for media capture in response to inputs such as light / partial presses accompanied by movement as described with respect to FIGS.6A-6AI. For example, as illustrated in FIGS.10L-10N, after selecting to associate the synthetic depth-of-field setting with the hardware button, the computer system adjusts a simulated focal length (e.g., selectively applying blur to simulate focus conditions) in response to inputs such as light / partial presses accompanied by movement as described with respect to FIGS.6A-6AI. For example, as illustrated in FIGS.10O-10R, after selecting to associate the zoom setting with the hardware button, the computer system adjusts the zoom in response to inputs such as light / partial presses accompanied by movement as described with respect to FIGS.6A-6AI. (in some embodiments, the second criterion is satisfied if the second operation is currently (e.g., remains) associated with the first hardware button.) (in some embodiments, the first criterion and the second criterion are mutually exclusive.) (in some embodiments, the first and / or second set of one or more criterion includes a criterion that is satisfied when the third input is detected while displaying a respective user interface. For example, the computer system only performs the first operation if an appropriate application (e.g., a camera application for a camera function) is open when the third input is detected. In some embodiments, if the third input is detected while displaying a different user interface, the computer system opens the respective user interface in response to the third input.) (in some embodiments, the first and / or second set of one or more criterion includes a criterion that is satisfied when the third input includes an input of a particular type, such as a press and / or a movement / gesture. In some embodiments, the first and / or second set of one or more criterion includes a criterion that is satisfied when the third input includes an input with particular characteristics, such as a press of a certain intensity (e.g., a light / partial press or a hard / full press), a press of a certain duration, a certain type of gesture, and / or a certain magnitude of gesture. In some embodiments, if the third input does not include an input of the particular type / characteristics, the computer system performs an operation other than the first operation, the second operation, and / or the one or more respective operations.)

[0071] In some embodiments, the computer system deemphasizes other UI while controls for changing a customizable function (e.g., the currently-selected operation; e.g., the first operation and / or the second operation) are displayed (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10C-10D and / or 10L, where the computer system displays the camera user interface with a “quiet” or grayed-out appearance while displaying the menu of settings). In some embodiments, the computer system shows the menu options in a cut-out of the user interface (e.g., as illustrated 1615614854 532Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in FIGS.10C and / or 10L, where the computer system displays the menu of settings as a “notch” near the hardware button). In some embodiments, the computer system dims out other portions of the user interface (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10C, 10D, and / or 10L, where the computer system fades or grays out portions or all of the camera user interface behind the menu of settings).

[0072] In some embodiments, the customizable function is a function that corresponds to a press input on the button (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10G, 10J, 10N, 10O, 10Q, and / or 10T, where, in response to light / partial press inputs (e.g., as described with respect to FIGS.6A- 6AI), the computer system displays a control UI element for adjusting the zoom level, exposure, and / or synthetic depth-of-field settings based on the setting currently associated with the hardware button). In some embodiments, the customizable function is a function that corresponds to a movement input on the button (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10G, 10J, 10N, 10O, 10Q, and / or 10T, where, in response to movement inputs (e.g., as described with respect to FIGS.6A-6AI), the computer system adjusts the zoom level, exposure, and / or synthetic depth-of-field settings based on the setting currently associated with the hardware button).

[0073] In some embodiments, one or more other inputs with the button remain unchanged when the customizable function changes (e.g., the computer system captures media in response to full / hard button presses and / or inputs selecting the software capture button via the touch-sensitive surface of the display, regardless of whether the hardware button is currently associated with adjusting the exposure setting (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10E-10K), adjusting the synthetic depth-of-field setting (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10M-10N), and / or adjusting the zoom (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10O-10R). In some embodiments, press or tap inputs remain unchanged when the customizable function changes. In some embodiments, the other inputs correspond to media capture inputs.

[0074] In some embodiments, the customizable function is consistent across multiple different applications (e.g., multiple different media capture applications) (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10F-10J, where the user adjusts (e.g., via the hardware button; e.g., via light / partial presses accompanied by movement on the hardware button and / or the touch-sensitive surface) the exposure setting for media capture in a default camera application, and in FIGS. 10T-10T-1, where the user adjusts (e.g., via the hardware button; e.g., via light / partial presses accompanied by movement on the hardware button and / or the touch-sensitive surface) the exposure setting for media capture in a different camera application, such as a social media 1615614854 533Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 application with a media capture utility). In some embodiments, the customizable function changes a property of an input that is provided to the different applications (e.g., a camera feed) (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10P-10T-1, the user adjusts the settings (e.g., zoom, exposure, and / or synthetic depth-of-field) of the camera data being provided to the social media application for its media capture utility).

[0075] In some embodiments, the customizable function is a media capture function (e.g., a media capture setting or option, such as a zoom setting, an exposure setting, a synthetic depth-of-field effect setting, a focus setting, a filter setting, and / or a capture guidance setting, as illustrated in FIGS.10C-10U). In some embodiments, the customizable function is a zoom function (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10O and 10P-1-10Q, where the computer system adjusts the zoom level for media capture in response to inputs detected while the zoom function is currently selected (e.g., associated with the hardware button)). In some embodiments, the customizable function is a simulated depth of field effect setting (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS. 10M-10N, where the computer system adjusts a simulated focal length for media capture (e.g., blurs portions of the media capture to simulate certain focal conditions) in response to inputs detected while the synthetic depth-of-field function is currently selected (e.g., associated with the hardware button)). In some embodiments, the customizable function is an exposure setting (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10F-10J and 10T-10T-1, where the computer system adjusts the exposure of media capture in response to inputs detected while the synthetic depth-of-field function is currently selected (e.g., associated with the hardware button).

[0076] In some embodiments, pressing the button while not in a camera application launches the camera application (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10A-10B, where the computer system opens a default camera application in response to pressing the hardware button while in a media player application, e.g., in contrast to FIG.10H, where the computer system performs a media capture in response to pressing the hardware button while in the default camera application).

[0077] In some embodiments, pressing the button while in multiple different camera user interfaces performs a camera function (e.g., starting media capture) (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10H and 10T-1, where the computer system performs a media capture in response to pressing the hardware button while displaying either the default camera application or another camera application, such as a social media application with a media capture utility). 1615614854 534Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501

[0078] In some embodiments, one camera user interface gets a subset of the options that are available to the other camera user interface (e.g., zoom, exposure, and tone, but not portrait) (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10C-10D, in a default camera application, the menu of settings includes zoom, exposure, synthetic depth-of-field, focus, filter, and capture guidance customizable functions, and as illustrated in FIG.10S, in the other camera application (e.g., the social media application with the media capture utility), the menu of settings includes only zoom, exposure, synthetic depth-of-field, and focus customizable functions.

[0079] In some embodiments, in response to a button press, if the button press was detected while not displaying a camera app that is associated with the button, the computer system launches a default camera application, and if the button press was detected while displaying a camera application associated with the button, the computer system performs an operation associated with the currently displayed camera app (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.10A-10B, in response to a button press detected while displaying a media viewer application, the computer system launches the default camera application, but as illustrated in FIGS.10H-10I and 10T- 1-10U, in response to button presses detected while displaying either the default camera application or a different camera application, the computer system performs a media capture). In some embodiments, the user can pick which camera app is considered the default camera application (e.g., if the user selects the social media application with the media capture utility, illustrated in FIGS.10P-10U, the computer system would open the social media application (e.g., and / or the media capture utility of the social media application) in response to the input illustrated at FIG.10A).

[0080] The following is a description of a method, for customizing playback speed of video media, in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, and / or 600) that is in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a display controller; a touch-sensitive display system; a display (e.g., integrated and / or connected), a 3D display, a transparent display, a projector, and / or a heads- up display), e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6A-6B. In some embodiments, the computer system is optionally in communication with one or more input devices, such as mechanical (e.g., physically depressible), solid-state, intensity-sensitive, and / or touch-sensitive (e.g., capacitive) hardware buttons and / or surfaces In some embodiments, the computer system is optionally in communication with one or more cameras, such as a rear (user-facing) camera and a forward (environment-facing) camera and / or a plurality of cameras with different lenses, such as a standard camera, a telephoto camera, and / or a wide-angle camera. In some 1615614854 535Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 embodiments, the computer system is optionally in communication with one or more sensors, such as camera sensors, optical sensors, depth sensors, capacitive sensors, intensity sensors, motion sensors, vibration sensors, and / or audio sensors.

[0081] The computer system receives a request to play a video media item (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.12A, where the computer system detects an input selecting to play a video) (e.g., a multi-frame media capture, such as a standard video, a spatial video, and / or a multi-frame photo capture). In response to receiving the request to play the video media item, the computer system plays the video item, including, while playing the video media item, decreasing (e.g., automatically and / or in response to a user input, such as an input selecting to enable cinematic speed adjustments) a playback speed (e.g., the speed at which time appears to advance in the video with respect to real time, wherein advancing one second of capture time (e.g., “real time”) per second of playback appears to the user as “normal” speed, advancing more than one second of capture time per second of playback appears to the user as fast motion / sped up video, and advancing less than one second of capture time per second of playback appears to the user as slow motion / slowed down video) of a respective portion of the video media item (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.12D-12H and / or 12K-12L, which illustrate playback timing diagrams where the D-E, G-J, E-F, K-L, E-G, and / or N-P portions of the represented videos are slowed down with respect to other portions of the video during playback) (e.g., the first video segment appears slowed down during playback with respect to the timescale of capture (e.g., real time) and / or with respect to the timescale of other segments of the video media item).

[0082] The respective portion of the video media item is automatically selected (e.g., by the computer system or by a remote computer system) based on content of the video media item (the computer system automatically detects at least one “apex” segment of the video media item, which is a portion of the video media item depicting relatively high levels of activity, motion, detail, and / or significance, e.g., compared to at least one other segment of the video media item), including: in accordance with a determination that a first portion of the video media item satisfies a set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the first portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item (e.g., the respective portion includes the first portion); and in accordance with a determination that a second portion of the video media item, different from the first portion of the video media item, satisfies the set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the second portion of the video media item relative to at 1615614854 536Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item (e.g., the respective portion includes the second portion). For example, as illustrated in FIGS.12B- 12C, the computer system automatically identifies the portion D-E of the video to slow down, as the portion D-E includes the frames of the video where the object is jumping off of a ramp, and as illustrated in FIGS.12M-1-12M-2, the computer system automatically identifies the portions D-E and G-I to slow down, as the portion D-E includes the frames of the video where the object is jumping off of a ramp and the portion G-I includes the frames of the video where the object is flying towards the camera. In some embodiments, decreasing the playback speed of the respective portion of the video media item, including slowing down the first and / or second portions of the video media item, includes reducing the frame rate of playback of the respective portion. For example, for a video media item captured at 60 FPS, the computer system plays back the first and / or second portions at 30FPS, so the timescale of the respective portion appears to the user at half speed. In some embodiments, decreasing the playback speed of the respective portion of the video media item, including slowing down the first and / or second portions of the video media item, includes including (e.g., playing) additional frames during playback of the first and / or second portions, e.g., by adding interpolated frames (e.g., if the video media item was captured at a lower frame rate and / or cannot be slowed down without negatively impacting playback quality, for instance, by reducing the playback frame rate below a desired playback frame rate) and / or foregoing skipping / dropping frames from the first and / or second portion (e.g., if the video media item was captured at higher frame rate than the desired playback frame rate). For example, for a video media item captured at 60 FPS, the computer system adds interpolated frames to the first and / or second portions of the video media item at a 1:1 ratio to effectively turn the first and / or second portions into 120 FPS video, such that playback of the first and / or second portions of the video media item at 60 FPS appears at a half-speed timescale. In some embodiments, decreasing the playback speed of the respective portion of the video media item, including slowing down the first and / or second portions of the video media item, includes increasing the frame rate of playback of a different segment of the video media item and / or dropping additional frames during playback of the different segment. For example, the computer system “fast forwards” non-apex moments.

[0083] In some embodiments, the computer system identifies the respective portion of the video media item, including the first and / or second portions, and in response to identifying the first video segment, the computer system, via the display generation component, a prompt 1615614854 537Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 (e.g., text, symbols, icons, highlighting, and / or other visual elements) for decreasing the playback speed of the respective portion of the video media item, . In some embodiments, the prompt includes an indication of the first video segment, e.g., highlighting or otherwise visually indicating the “apex moment” portion of the video media item that satisfies the video characteristic criteria. In some embodiments, the prompt includes and / or is displayed concurrently with one or more selectable UI objects (e.g., affordances) that, when selected, initiate a process for changing the playback speed of the video media item to slow down the first video segment relative to the first timescale during playback. In some embodiments, the computer system selects the respective portion (e.g., determines that the first video segment satisfies the one or more video characteristic criteria) based visual content (e.g., video component), audio content, spatial content (e.g., depth information and / or motion data), and / or other metadata (e.g., capture specifications, sensor data, image processing data, audio processing data, and / or user information) associated with the video media item. In some embodiments, computer system identifies the first video segment while displaying, via the display generation component, a representation of the video media item, e.g., in a media viewing user interface or a media editing user interface. In some embodiments, the set of one or more video characteristic criteria include a criterion that is met when a portion of the video media item includes (e.g., depicts) more than a threshold amount of activity, a criterion that is met when a portion of the video media item includes more than a threshold change in activity, a criterion that is met when a portion of the video media item includes more than a threshold amount of motion, a criterion that is met when a portion of the video media item includes more than a threshold change in motion, a criterion that is met when a portion of the video media item includes more than a threshold amount of detail, and / or a criterion that is met when a portion of the video media item includes content of determined significance (e.g., a recognized person, pet, and / or other subject).

[0084] In some embodiments, the computer system gradually changes speed near the apex moment (e.g., the portion of the video the computer system identifies to slow down; e.g., the first portion and / or the second portion of the video) (e.g., as illustrated by the timing diagram in FIG.12H, where the computer system slows down portion G-J to half speed, and slows down portions E-F and K-L, which lead into and out of portion G-J, to 1.5x speed). In some embodiments, the computer system gradually changes the speed before the apex moment (e.g., as illustrated with portion E-F in FIG.12H). In some embodiments, the computer 1615614854 538Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 system gradually changes the speed after the apex moment (e.g., as illustrated with portion K- L in FIG.12H).

[0085] In some embodiments, the computer system changes the speed for multiple apex moments (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.12L, where portions G-J and N-P are slowed down, and / or in FIGS.12M-1-12M-2, where portions D-E and G-I are slowed down).

[0086] In some embodiments, the computer system changes speed for non-apex moments (e.g., speed up other parts of video to “fast forward” to the apex moments; In some embodiments, mix slowed down, sped up, and / or normal speed moments for cinematic effect) (e.g., as illustrated in in FIG.12L, where portions G-J and N-P (apex moments) are slowed down and portion A-D is sped up).

[0087] In some embodiments, the computer system uses interpolated frames to change playback speed (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.12D-12F and 12L, where interpolated frames (e.g., D’, E’, etc.) are inserted in between the frames of the identified apex moment (e.g., D, E, etc.)).

[0088] In some embodiments, the computer system allows editing of apex moments to change position, size, and / or speed of slowed down playback (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS. 12I-12K, where the computer system initially determines to slow down portion D-E to half speed, and the user edits the adjustment to slow down portion E-G to one third speed). In some embodiments, the computer system displays an indication of the respective portion (e.g., the automatically detected apex moment) while editing (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.12J and 12M-2, where the portions of the video that will be slowed down are highlighted and labeled in a timeline of the video at the bottom of the editing user interface).

[0089] In some embodiments, in response to automatically selecting the respective portion, the computer system displays a prompt to enable changing playback speed (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.12A and 12I, where the computer system displays a selectable UI element indicating that an apex moment has been detected, which can be selected as illustrated in FIG.12I to open an editing interface to edit the playback speed). In some embodiments, the computer system displays the prompt in a media editing UI (e.g., flag / highlight apex moment in timeline) (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.12J and 12M-2, where the computer system displays indications of the identified apex moments (e.g., highlighting and labeling) along with selectable UI elements for editing the playback speed). In some embodiments, the prompt includes an affordance that can be selected to initiate a process for changing the playback 1615614854 539Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 speed (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.12I-12J, where the computer system open an editing interface to edit the playback speed in response to a selection of the “apex” UI element).

[0090] The following is a description of a method for controlling settings of a computer system based on movement characteristics of hardware inputs, in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, and / or 600) that is in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a display controller; a touch-sensitive display system; a display (e.g., integrated and / or connected), a 3D display, a transparent display, a projector, and / or a heads-up display), e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.6A- 6B. In some embodiments, the computer system is optionally in communication with one or more input devices, such as mechanical (e.g., physically depressible), solid-state, intensity- sensitive, and / or touch-sensitive (e.g., capacitive) hardware buttons and / or surfaces In some embodiments, the computer system is optionally in communication with one or more cameras, such as a rear (user-facing) camera and a forward (environment-facing) camera and / or a plurality of cameras with different lenses, such as a standard camera, a telephoto camera, and / or a wide-angle camera. In some embodiments, the computer system is optionally in communication with one or more sensors, such as camera sensors, optical sensors, depth sensors, capacitive sensors, intensity sensors, motion sensors, vibration sensors, and / or audio sensors.

[0091] The computer system detects (e.g., via a touch-sensitive surface of the display generation component, via a hardware input device separate from the display generation component, and / or via one or more sensors of the computer system) an input (e.g., a touch, tap, press, click, gesture, and / or air gesture input) directed to a control element of a camera user interface, wherein the input includes a detected movement component (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14B, 14E-14F, 14H, 14J-14K, 14N-14O-1, 14P-14Q, and / or 14R-14S, where the computer system detects inputs via the hardware button and / or the touch-sensitive surface of the display that include movement while contact with the hardware button and / or touch- sensitive surface is detected (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14B, 14F, 14H, 14J, 14N, 14O, 14P, and / or 14R, where the solid dots illustrated on the hardware button represents a current contact location) and / or movement near, during, or after the detected contact ends (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14E, 14K, 14O-1, 14Q, and / or 14S, where the dashed lines and open dots illustrated above the hardware button represent movement detected and / or inferred after the end of contact)). In some embodiments, the input directed to the control element of the camera user interface is an input via an input device associated with controlling the camera 1615614854 540Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 user interface, such as a hardware button, surface, and / or knob. In some embodiments, the computer system displays the control element, e.g., as a user interface object, and the input directed to the control element of the camera user interface is an input directed to a displayed location of the user interface object.

[0092] In response to detecting the input directed to the control element (e.g., and while the input and / or the movement component of the input are ongoing), the computer system causes a first adjustment to a value of a camera parameter (e.g., a zoom level, brightness, filter intensity, simulated depth-of-field setting, and / or focus setting) associated with the control element (e.g., changing a value of the parameter), wherein the first adjustment is based on the detected movement component (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14B, 14C, 14F, 14H, 14J, 14N, 14O, 14P, and / or 14R, the computer system adjusts an exposure setting and a zoom setting based on the characteristics of the movements represented by arrows, for instance, as though the input were dragging, sliding, scrolling, and / or rotating a physical settings control, such as a slider, knob, crown, and / or wheel; e.g., as illustrated in FIG.14C, the computer system “moves” the setting (e.g., along the scales illustrated in FIG.14A-1 for exposure, zoom, and / or filter intensity) along with the location of the contact (e.g., the solid dot), e.g., adjusting the setting in the same direction as the movement of the contact, at the same speed as the movement of the contact, and / or by an amount proportionally and / or otherwise related to the lateral distance of the movement of the contact). For example, the computer system adjusts the camera parameter based on a current direction, acceleration, speed, and / or distance of the detected movement. In some embodiments, the computer system adjusts the camera parameter using simulated physics based on the movement component, e.g., as if the camera parameter were controlled by a physical dial or slider being moved by the input. In some embodiments, causing the first adjustment to the camera parameter includes updating an appearance of the camera user interface, e.g., changing a zoom level, brightness, filter intensity, simulated depth-of-field effect, and / or focus represented in a camera preview.

[0093] The computer system detects an end of the input (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14E, 14G, 14I, 14K, 14O-1, 14Q and / or 14S, where the open dots represent that contact with the hardware button and / or the touch-sensitive display has ended). In some embodiments, detecting the end of the first input includes detecting a lift-off of an input element, e.g., a user’s finger or a stylus. In some embodiments, detecting the end of the first input includes detecting an intensity of the input falling below a threshold intensity. 1615614854 541Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501

[0094] After (e.g., in response to) detecting the end of the input, the computer system causes a second adjustment to the value of the camera parameter associated with the control element, wherein the second adjustment is based on the detected movement component (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14B, 14E, 14J-14K, 14O-14O-1, 14P-14Q, and / or 14R-14S, after contact ends following the movement depicted in FIGS.14B, 14J, 14O, 14P, and 14R, the computer system continues to adjust the settings as illustrated in FIGS.14E, 14K, 14O-1, 14Q, and / or 14S, where the dashed lines and open dots illustrated above the hardware button represent movement detected and / or inferred after the end of contact). For example, the computer system continues to adjust the camera parameter based on the direction, acceleration, speed, and / or distance of the movement at, near, and / or after (e.g., as detected using a proximity sensor or other motion sensor) the end of the input. In some embodiments, the computer system adjusts the camera parameter using simulated physics based on the movement component at or near the end of the input, e.g., as if a physical dial / slider controlling the parameter continues to move with some momentum from the movement of the input. In some embodiments, causing the second adjustment to the camera parameter includes updating the appearance of the camera user interface, e.g., changing a zoom level, brightness, filter intensity, simulated depth-of-field effect, and / or focus represented in a camera preview. In some embodiments, the computer system causes the second adjustment to the camera parameter in accordance with a determination that the movement component did not end more than a threshold period of time prior to the end of the input (e.g., the movement was ongoing at or near the end of the input), and in accordance with a determination that the movement component ended more than the threshold period of time prior to the end of the input, the computer system foregoes causing the second adjustment.

[0095] In some embodiments, the amount of adjustment is based on a magnitude of the movement (e.g., as illustrated in 14B, 14P, and / or 14R, the computer system “moves” the currently-selected setting value along the scales illustrated in FIG.14A-1 by a distance that corresponds to the distance traveled by the contact; e.g., FIG.12C illustrates a proportional relationship between the distance traveled by the contact and the exposure value (e.g., as the exposure values are spaced evenly apart on the scale illustrated in FIG.14A-1); e.g., FIGS. 14P and 14R illustrate a logarithmic relationship between the distance traveled by the contact and the zoom value (e.g., as the zoom values are spaced at successively closer intervals on the scale illustrated in FIG.14A-1). 1615614854 542Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501

[0096] In some embodiments, the amount of adjustment after the end of the input is based on a magnitude of the movement near the end of the input (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14E, 14K, 14O-1, 14Q, and / or 14S, where the computer system continues to adjust by an amount based on the speed and magnitude of movement detected during contact in FIGS.14B, 14J, 14O, 14P, and 14R right before the contact lifts off).

[0097] In some embodiments, the direction of adjustment is based on a direction of the movement (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14B and 14E, the computer system adjusts the exposure upwards based on the rightwards movement detected during and near the end of contact, and as illustrated in FIGS.14H and 14J, the computer system adjusts the exposure downwards based on the leftwards movement detected during and near the end of contact).

[0098] In some embodiments, if the movement is moving in the direction of a “snapping” value near (or after) the end of the input, the computer system stops adjusting at the value (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14O-14O-1, the computer system stops at a zoom “snapping” value of 1x, as the movements detected in FIG.14O and / or inferred in 14O-1 are moving in the direction of 1x from 0.9x, and as illustrated in FIGS.14R-14S, the computer system stops at a zoom “snapping” value of 8x, as the movements detected in 14R and / or inferred in 14S are moving in the direction of 8x from 4.3x).

[0099] In some embodiments, if adjusting the camera parameter based on the movement would move the camera parameter past a “snapping” value while the input is ongoing, the computer system move past the “snapping” value (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.12O-2-14P, the computer system adjusts from 1x to 2.1x zoom, moving past the “snapping” value of 2.0x because the movement in 14O-2 is detected during contact), and if adjusting the camera parameter based on the movement would move the camera parameter past a “snapping” value after the input has ended, the computer system stops at the “snapping” value (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14O-14O-1, the computer system stops adjusting at 1x zoom because contact has ended at FIG.14O-1).

[0100] In some embodiments, the parameter is a zoom parameter and the snapping value corresponds to higher quality images (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14N-14S, the computer system may “snap” the zoom value to 0.5x zoom, 1x zoom, 2x zoom, and / or 8x zoom, which may correspond to the optical zoom levels of the different cameras / lenses available to the computer system). In some embodiments, the snapping value corresponds to a fixed focal lengths that corresponds to a physical camera (e.g., the cameras illustrated in FIG.6A). In 1615614854 543Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 some embodiments, there are multiple snapping values (e.g., the computer system “snaps” the zoom to 1x zoom in FIG.14O-1 and to 8x zoom in FIG.14S).

[0101] In some embodiments, the computer system displays tick marks that correspond to evenly spaced values and compresses a space between subsequent tick marks (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.14A-1, on the zoom setting scale, each tick mark represents 0.1x zoom, and the space between the tick marks incrementally decreases between 0.5x, 1.0x, 2.0x, 4.0x, and 8.0x).

[0102] In some embodiments, the computer system visually highlights a tick mark (e.g., height, width, brightness) as it is selected, and then gradually revert the tick mark to the unselected state after it ceases to be selected concurrently show multiple tick marks in different states of highlighting as the user scrolls through the tick marks (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14C and 14M). In some embodiments, the computer system visually highlight one or more tick marks (e.g., to a lesser extent than the currently selected tick mark) before they are selected (e.g., based on the current direction of movement). In some embodiments, during movement, more tick marks are visually highlighted behind the currently-selected tick mark (e.g., with respect to the current direction of movement) than in front of the currently-selected tick mark (e.g., long tail indicates direction of movement).

[0103] In some embodiments, the tick marks return to unselected state using simulated physics (e.g., spring physics) (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14C-14D, where the tick marks gradually revert after being selected and / or after the stop of movement).

[0104] In some embodiments, the tick marks are displayed in a cutout of another user interface and the cutout shifts when an end is reached (e.g., expanding in one or more directions and / or shifting in one or more directions) (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14E-1-14G, where the user attempts to drag the exposure level past the maximum available exposure level of +1.0, causing the control UI element to shift sideways along with the movement and then snap back to its original position). In some embodiments, the cutout shifts back after shifting (e.g., when a maximum value is reached, when a maximum extent of shifting is reached, or when the end of the input is detected) (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.14G).

[0105] In some embodiments, the camera control is a hardware control (e.g., the hardware button, as described with respect to FIGS.6A-6AI). In some embodiments, the camera control is a software control (e.g., the control UI elements, as described with respect to FIGS. 6A-6AI). 1615614854 544Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501

[0106] In some embodiments, the camera parameter includes one or more of zoom, exposure control, or filter intensity (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.14A-14S and FIGS.6A-6AI, where the computer system adjusts zoom, exposure, and filter intensity in response to press inputs accompanied by movement detected via the hardware button and / or the touch-sensitive surface). 1615614854 545including API-calling module 3180) that communicate with implementation module 3100. In some embodiments, API 3190 allows multiple API-calling modules written in different programming languages to communicate with implementation module 3100 (e.g., API 3190 can include features for translating calls and returns between implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180) while API 3190 is implemented in terms of a specific programming language. In some embodiments, API-calling module 3180 calls APIs from different providers such as a set of APIs from an OS provider, another set of APIs from a plug-in provider, and / or another set of APIs from another provider (e.g., the provider of a software library) or creator of the another set of APIs.

[0200] Examples of API 3190 can include one or more of: a pairing API (e.g., for establishing secure connection, e.g., with an accessory), a device detection API (e.g., for locating nearby devices, e.g., media devices and / or smartphone), a payment API, a UIKit API (e.g., for generating user interfaces), a location detection API, a locator API, a maps API, a health sensor API, a sensor API, a messaging API, a push notification API, a streaming API, a collaboration API, a video conferencing API, an application store API, an advertising services API, a web browser API (e.g., WebKit API), a vehicle API, a networking API, a WiFi API, a Bluetooth API, an NFC API, a UWB API, a fitness API, a smart home API, contact transfer API, photos API, camera API, and / or image processing API. In some embodiments, the sensor API is an API for accessing data associated with a sensor of device 3150. For example, the sensor API can provide access to raw sensor data. For another example, the sensor API can provide data derived (and / or generated) from the raw sensor data. In some embodiments, the sensor data includes temperature data, image data, video data, audio data, heart rate data, IMU (inertial measurement unit) data, lidar data, location data, GPS data, and / or camera data. In some embodiments, the sensor includes one or more of an accelerometer, temperature sensor, infrared sensor, optical sensor, heartrate sensor, barometer, gyroscope, proximity sensor, temperature sensor, and / or biometric sensor.

[0201] In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 is a system (e.g., operating system and / or server system) software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that is constructed to perform an operation in response to receiving an API call via API 3190. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 is constructed to provide an API response (via API 3190) as a result of processing an API call. By way of example, implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180 can each be any one of an operating system, a library, a device driver, an API, an application program, or other module.It should be understood that implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180 can be the same or different type of module from each other. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 is embodied at least in part in firmware, microcode, or hardware logic.

[0202] In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 returns a value through API 3190 in response to an API call from API-calling module 3180. While API 3190 defines the syntax and result of an API call (e.g., how to invoke the API call and what the API call does), API 3190 might not reveal how implementation module 3100 accomplishes the function specified by the API call. Various API calls are transferred via the one or more application programming interfaces between API-calling module 3180 and implementation module 3100. Transferring the API calls can include issuing, initiating, invoking, calling, receiving, returning, and / or responding to the function calls or messages. In other words, transferring can describe actions by either of API-calling module 3180 or implementation module 3100. In some embodiments, a function call or other invocation of API 3190 sends and / or receives one or more parameters through a parameter list or other structure.

[0203] In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 provides more than one API, each providing a different view of or with different aspects of functionality implemented by implementation module 3100. For example, one API of implementation module 3100 can provide a first set of functions and can be exposed to third-party developers, and another API of implementation module 3100 can be hidden (e.g., not exposed) and provide a subset of the first set of functions and also provide another set of functions, such as testing or debugging functions which are not in the first set of functions. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 calls one or more other components via an underlying API and thus is both an API-calling module and an implementation module. It should be recognized that implementation module 3100 can include additional functions, methods, classes, data structures, and / or other features that are not specified through API 3190 and are not available to API-calling module 3180. It should also be recognized that API-calling module 3180 can be on the same system as implementation module 3100 or can be located remotely and access implementation module 3100 using API 3190 over a network. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100, API 3190, and / or API-calling module 3180 is stored in a machine-readable medium, which includes any mechanism for storing information in a form readable by a machine (e.g., a computer or other data processing system). For example, amachine-readable medium can include magnetic disks, optical disks, random access memory; read only memory, and / or flash memory devices.

[0204] An application programming interface (API) is an interface between a first software process and a second software process that specifies a format for communication between the first software process and the second software process. Limited APIs (e.g., private APIs or partner APIs) are APIs that are accessible to a limited set of software processes (e.g., only software processes within an operating system or only software processes that are approved to access the limited APIs). Public APIs that are accessible to a wider set of software processes. Some APIs enable software processes to communicate about or set a state of one or more input devices (e.g., one or more touch sensors, proximity sensors, visual sensors, motion / orientation sensors, pressure sensors, intensity sensors, sound sensors, wireless proximity sensors, biometric sensors, buttons, switches, rotatable elements, and / or external controllers). Some APIs enable software processes to communicate about and / or set a state of one or more output generation components (e.g., one or more audio output generation components, one or more display generation components, and / or one or more tactile output generation components). Some APIs enable particular capabilities (e.g., scrolling, handwriting, text entry, image editing, and / or image creation) to be accessed, performed, and / or used by a software process (e.g., generating outputs for use by a software process based on input from the software process). Some APIs enable content from a software process to be inserted into a template and displayed in a user interface that has a layout and / or behaviors that are specified by the template.

[0205] Many software platforms include a set of frameworks that provides the core objects and core behaviors that a software developer needs to build software applications that can be used on the software platform. Software developers use these objects to display content onscreen, to interact with that content, and to manage interactions with the software platform. Software applications rely on the set of frameworks for their basic behavior, and the set of frameworks provides many ways for the software developer to customize the behavior of the application to match the specific needs of the software application. Many of these core objects and core behaviors are accessed via an API. An API will typically specify a format for communication between software processes, including specifying and grouping available variables, functions, and protocols. An API call (sometimes referred to as an API request) will typically be sent from a sending software process to a receiving software process as a way to accomplish one or more of the following: the sending software process requestinginformation from the receiving software process (e.g., for the sending software process to take action on), the sending software process providing information to the receiving software process (e.g., for the receiving software process to take action on), the sending software process requesting action by the receiving software process, or the sending software process providing information to the receiving software process about action taken by the sending software process. Interaction with a device (e.g., using a user interface) will in some circumstances include the transfer and / or receipt of one or more API calls (e.g., multiple API calls) between multiple different software processes (e.g., different portions of an operating system, an application and an operating system, or different applications) via one or more APIs (e.g., via multiple different APIs). For example, when an input is detected the direct sensor data is frequently processed into one or more input events that are provided (e.g., via an API) to a receiving software process that makes some determination based on the input events, and then sends (e.g., via an API) information to a software process to perform an operation (e.g., change a device state and / or user interface) based on the determination. While a determination and an operation performed in response could be made by the same software process, alternatively the determination could be made in a first software process and relayed (e.g., via an API) to a second software process, that is different from the first software process, that causes the operation to be performed by the second software process. Alternatively, the second software process could relay instructions (e.g., via an API) to a third software process that is different from the first software process and / or the second software process to perform the operation. It should be understood that some or all user interactions with a computer system could involve one or more API calls within a step of interacting with the computer system (e.g., between different software components of the computer system or between a software component of the computer system and a software component of one or more remote computer systems). It should be understood that some or all user interactions with a computer system could involve one or more API calls between steps of interacting with the computer system (e.g., between different software components of the computer system or between a software component of the computer system and a software component of one or more remote computer systems).

[0206] In some embodiments, the application can be any suitable type of application, including, for example, one or more of: a browser application, an application that functions as an execution environment for plug-ins, widgets or other applications, a fitness application, ahealth application, a digital payments application, a media application, a social network application, a messaging application, and / or a maps application.

[0207] In some embodiments, the application is an application that is pre-installed on the first computer system at purchase (e.g., a first-party application). In some embodiments, the application is an application that is provided to the first computer system via an operating system update file (e.g., a first-party application). In some embodiments, the application is an application that is provided via an application store. In some embodiments, the application store is pre-installed on the first computer system at purchase (e.g., a first-party application store) and allows download of one or more applications. In some embodiments, the application store is a third-party application store (e.g., an application store that is provided by another device, downloaded via a network, and / or read from a storage device). In some embodiments, the application is a third-party application (e.g., an app that is provided by an application store, downloaded via a network, and / or read from a storage device). In some embodiments, the application controls the first computer system to perform methods 700, 900, 1100, 1300, 1500, 1700, 1900, and / or 2100 (FIGS. 7, 9A-9B, 11A-11B, 13, 15, 17, 19, and / or 21) by calling an application programming interface (API) provided by the system process using one or more parameters.

[0208] In some embodiments, exemplary APIs provided by the system process include one or more of a pairing API (e.g., for establishing secure connection, e.g., with an accessory), a device detection API (e.g., for locating nearby devices, e.g., media devices and / or smartphone), a payment API, a UIKit API (e.g., for generating user interfaces), a location detection API, a locator API, a maps API, a health sensor API, a sensor API, a messaging API, a push notification API, a streaming API, a collaboration API, a video conferencing API, an application store API, an advertising services API, a web browser API (e.g., WebKit API), a vehicle API, a networking API, a WiFi API, a Bluetooth API, an NFC API, a UWB API, a fitness API, a smart home API, contact transfer API, a photos API, a camera API, and / or an image processing API.

[0209] In some embodiments, at least one API is a software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that provides an interface that allows a different module (e.g., API-calling module 3180) to access and use one or more functions, methods, procedures, data structures, classes, and / or other services provided by an implementation module of the system process. The API can define one or more parameters that are passed between the API-calling module and the implementation module. In some embodiments, API3190 defines a first API call that can be provided by API-calling module 3180. The implementation module is a system software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that is constructed to perform an operation in response to receiving an API call via the API. In some embodiments, the implementation module is constructed to provide an API response (via the API) as a result of processing an API call. In some embodiments, the implementation module is included in the device (e.g., 3150) that runs the application. In some embodiments, the implementation module is included in an electronic device that is separate from the device that runs the application.

[0210] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces that are, optionally, implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device 100.

[0211] FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof• Signal strength indicator(s) 402 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;• Time 404;• Bluetooth indicator 405;• Battery status indicator 406;• Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as: o Icon 416 for telephone module 138, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages; o Icon 418 for e-mail client module 140, labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator 410 of the number of unread e-mails; o Icon 420 for browser module 147, labeled “Browser;” and o Icon 422 for video and music player module 152, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 152, labeled “iPod;” and• Icons for other applications, such as: o Icon 424 for IM module 141, labeled “Messages;”o Icon 426 for calendar module 148, labeled “Calendar;” o Icon 428 for image management module 144, labeled “Photos;” o Icon 430 for camera module 143, labeled “Camera;” o Icon 432 for online video module 155, labeled “Online Video;” o Icon 434 for stocks widget 149-2, labeled “Stocks;” o Icon 436 for map module 154, labeled “Maps;” o Icon 438 for weather widget 149-1, labeled “Weather;” o Icon 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4, labeled “Clock;” o Icon 442 for workout support module 142, labeled “Workout Support;” o Icon 444 for notes module 153, labeled “Notes;” and o Icon 446 for a settings application or module, labeled “Settings,” which provides access to settings for device 100 and its various applications 136.

[0212] It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in FIG. 4A are merely exemplary. For example, icon 422 for video and music player module 152 is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.

[0213] FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300, FIG. 3A) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 355, FIG. 3 A) that is separate from the display 450 (e.g., touch screen display 112). Device 300 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 359) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch- sensitive surface 451 and / or one or more tactile output generators 357 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300.

[0214] Although some of the examples that follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display 112 (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 4B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in FIG. 4B) thatcorresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in FIG. 4B) on the display (e.g., display 450). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., contact 460 and contact 462 in FIG. 4B) with the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in FIG. 4B, contact 460 corresponds to 468 and contact 462 corresponds to 470). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 460 and 462, and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch- sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g., display 450 in FIG. 4B) of the multifunction device when the touch- sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein.

[0215] Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.

[0216] FIG. 5A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 500. Device 500 includes body 502. In some embodiments, device 500 can include some or all of the features described with respect to devices 100 and 300 (e.g., FIGS. 1 A-4B). In some embodiments, device 500 has touch-sensitive display screen 504, hereafter touch screen 504. Alternatively, or in addition to touch screen 504, device 500 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. As with devices 100 and 300, in some embodiments, touch screen 504 (or the touch-sensitive surface) optionally includes one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied. The one or more intensity sensors of touch screen 504 (or the touch-sensitive surface) can provide output data that represents the intensity of touches. The user interface of device 500 can respond to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device 500.

[0217] Exemplary techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity are found, for example, in related applications: International Patent Application Serial No.PCT / US2013 / 040061, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application,” filed May 8, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO / 2013 / 169849, and International Patent Application Serial No. PCT / US2013 / 069483, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships,” filed November 11, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO / 2014 / 105276, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

[0218] In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more input mechanisms 506 and 508. Input mechanisms 506 and 508, if included, can be physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms. In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permit attachment of device 500 with, for example, hats, eyewear, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers, belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachment mechanisms permit device 500 to be worn by a user.

[0219] FIG. 5B depicts exemplary personal electronic device 500. In some embodiments, device 500 can include some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS. 1 A, IB, and 3 A. Device 500 has bus 512 that operatively couples I / O section 514 with one or more computer processors 516 and memory 518. VO section 514 can be connected to display screen 504, which can have touch-sensitive component 522 and, optionally, intensity sensor 524 (e.g., contact intensity sensor). In addition, I / O section 514 can be connected with communication unit 530 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and / or other wireless communication techniques. Device 500 can include input mechanisms 506 and / or 508. Input mechanism 506 is, optionally, a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, for example. Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a button, in some examples.

[0220] Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a microphone, in some examples. Personal electronic device 500 optionally includes various sensors, such as GPS sensor 532, accelerometer 534, directional sensor 540 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 536, motion sensor 538, and / or a combination thereof, all of which can be operatively connected to VO section 514.

[0221] Memory 518 of personal electronic device 500 can include one or more non-transitory computer-readable storage mediums, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors 516, for example, can cause the computer processors to perform the techniques described below, including processes described with respect to FIGS. 7, 9A-9B, 11A-11B, 13, 15, 17, 19, and 21 (processes 700, 900, 1100, 1300, 1500, 1700, 1900, and 2100). A computer-readable storage medium can be any medium that can tangibly contain or store computer-executable instructions for use by or in connection with the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device. In some examples, the storage medium is a transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some examples, the storage medium is a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. The non- transitory computer-readable storage medium can include, but is not limited to, magnetic, optical, and / or semiconductor storages. Examples of such storage include magnetic disks, optical discs based on CD, DVD, or Blu-ray® technologies, as well as persistent solid-state memory such as flash, solid-state drives, and the like. Personal electronic device 500 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 5B, but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations.

[0222] As used here, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is, optionally, displayed on the display screen of devices 100, 300, and / or 500 (FIGS. 1 A, 3A, and 5A-5B). For example, an image (e.g., icon), a button, and text (e.g., hyperlink) each optionally constitute an affordance.

[0223] As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG.3 A or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 in FIG. 1 A or touch screen 112 in FIG. 4 A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted inaccordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user’s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).

[0224] As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and / or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally, based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds optionally includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensitythreshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation), rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.

[0225] FIG. 5C illustrates detecting a plurality of contacts 552A-552E on touch-sensitive display screen 504 with a plurality of intensity sensors 524A-524D. FIG. 5C additionally includes intensity diagrams that show the current intensity measurements of the intensity sensors 524A-524D relative to units of intensity. In this example, the intensity measurements of intensity sensors 524A and 524D are each 9 units of intensity, and the intensity measurements of intensity sensors 524B and 524C are each 7 units of intensity. In some implementations, an aggregate intensity is the sum of the intensity measurements of the plurality of intensity sensors 524A-524D, which in this example is 32 intensity units. In some embodiments, each contact is assigned a respective intensity that is a portion of the aggregate intensity. FIG. 5D illustrates assigning the aggregate intensity to contacts 552A- 552E based on their distance from the center of force 554. In this example, each of contacts 552 A, 552B, and 552E are assigned an intensity of contact of 8 intensity units of the aggregate intensity, and each of contacts 552C and 552D are assigned an intensity of contact of 4 intensity units of the aggregate intensity. More generally, in some implementations, each contact) is assigned a respective intensity Ij that is a portion of the aggregate intensity, A, in accordance with a predefined mathematical function, Ij = A (Dj / SDi), where Dj is the distance of the respective contact j to the center of force, and EDi is the sum of the distances of all the respective contacts (e.g., i=l to last) to the center of force. The operations described with reference to FIGS. 5C-5D can be performed using an electronic device similar or identical to device 100, 300, or 500. In some embodiments, a characteristic intensity of a contact is based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the intensity sensors are used to determine a single characteristic intensity (e.g., a single characteristic intensity of a single contact). It should be noted that the intensity diagrams are not part of a displayed user interface, but are included in FIGS. 5C-5D to aid the reader.

[0226] In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface optionally receives a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location, at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location is, optionally, based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm is, optionally, applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and / or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.

[0227] The intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, characterized relative to one or more intensity thresholds, such as a contact-detection intensity threshold, a light press intensity threshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and / or one or more other intensity thresholds. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures.

[0228] An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold and the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a“deep press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold and the light press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity below the contactdetection intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is zero. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is greater than zero.

[0229] In some embodiments described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., a “down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input).

[0230] FIGS. 5E-5H illustrate detection of a gesture that includes a press input that corresponds to an increase in intensity of a contact 562 from an intensity below a light press intensity threshold (e.g., “ITL”) in FIG. 5E, to an intensity above a deep press intensity threshold (e.g., “ITD”) in FIG. 5H. The gesture performed with contact 562 is detected on touch-sensitive surface 560 while cursor 576 is displayed over application icon 572B corresponding to App 2, on a displayed user interface 570 that includes application icons 572A-572D displayed in predefined region 574. In some embodiments, the gesture is detected on touch-sensitive display screen 504. The intensity sensors detect the intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 560. The device determines that the intensity of contact 562 peaked above the deep press intensity threshold (e.g., “ITD”). Contact 562 is maintained on touch-sensitive surface 560. In response to the detection of the gesture, and in accordance with contact 562 having an intensity that goes above the deep press intensity threshold (e.g.,“ITD”) during the gesture, reduced-scale representations 578A-578C (e.g., thumbnails) of recently opened documents for App 2 are displayed, as shown in FIGS. 5F-5H. In some embodiments, the intensity, which is compared to the one or more intensity thresholds, is the characteristic intensity of a contact. It should be noted that the intensity diagram for contact 562 is not part of a displayed user interface, but is included in FIGS. 5E-5H to aid the reader.

[0231] In some embodiments, the display of representations 578A-578C includes an animation. For example, representation 578A is initially displayed in proximity of application icon 572B, as shown in FIG. 5F. As the animation proceeds, representation 578A moves upward and representation 578B is displayed in proximity of application icon 572B, as shown in FIG. 5G. Then, representations 578A moves upward, 578B moves upward toward representation 578A, and representation 578C is displayed in proximity of application icon 572B, as shown in FIG. 5H. Representations 578A-578C form an array above icon 572B. In some embodiments, the animation progresses in accordance with an intensity of contact 562, as shown in FIGS. 5F-5G, where the representations 578A-578C appear and move upwards as the intensity of contact 562 increases toward the deep press intensity threshold (e.g., “ITD”). In some embodiments, the intensity, on which the progress of the animation is based, is the characteristic intensity of the contact. The operations described with reference to FIGS. 5E-5H can be performed using an electronic device similar or identical to device 100, 300, or 500.

[0232] In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, asubsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances).

[0233] For ease of explanation, the descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting either: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and / or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold.

[0234] As used herein, an “installed application” refers to a software application that has been downloaded onto an electronic device (e.g., devices 100, 300, and / or 500) and is ready to be launched (e.g., become opened) on the device. In some embodiments, a downloaded application becomes an installed application by way of an installation program that extracts program portions from a downloaded package and integrates the extracted portions with the operating system of the computer system.

[0235] As used herein, the terms “open application” or “executing application” refer to a software application with retained state information (e.g., as part of device / global internal state 157 and / or application internal state 192). An open or executing application is, optionally, any one of the following types of applications:• an active application, which is currently displayed on a display screen of the device that the application is being used on;• a background application (or background processes), which is not currently displayed, but one or more processes for the application are being processed by one or more processors; and• a suspended or hibernated application, which is not running, but has state information that is stored in memory (volatile and non-volatile, respectively) and that can be used to resume execution of the application.

[0236] As used herein, the term “closed application” refers to software applications without retained state information (e.g., state information for closed applications is not stored in a memory of the device). Accordingly, closing an application includes stopping and / or removing application processes for the application and removing state information for the application from the memory of the device. Generally, opening a second application while in a first application does not close the first application. When the second application is displayed and the first application ceases to be displayed, the first application becomes a background application.

[0237] As described herein, content is automatically generated by one or more computers in response to a request to generate the content. The automatically-generated content is optionally generated on-device (e.g., generated at least in part by a computer system at which a request to generate the content is received) and / or generated off-device (e.g., generated at least in part by one or more nearby computers that are available via a local network or one or more computers that are available via the internet). This automatically-generated content optionally includes visual content (e.g., images, graphics, and / or video), audio content, and / or text content.

[0238] In some embodiments, novel automatically-generated content that is generated via one or more artificial intelligence (Al) processes is referred to as generative content (e.g., generative images, generative graphics, generative video, generative audio, and / or generative text). Generative content is typically generated by an Al process based on a prompt that is provided to the Al process. An Al process typically uses one or more Al models to generate an output based on an input. An Al process optionally includes one or more pre-processing steps to adjust the input before it is used by the Al model to generate an output (e.g., adjustment to a user-provided prompt, creation of a system-generated prompt, and / or Al model selection). An Al process optionally includes one or more post-processing steps to adjust the output by the Al model (e.g., passing Al model output to a different Al model, upscaling, downscaling, cropping, formatting, and / or adding or removing metadata) before the output of the Al model used for other purposes such as being provided to a different software process for further processing or being presented (e.g., visually or audibly) to a user.An Al process that generates generative content is sometimes referred to as a generative Al process.

[0239] A prompt for generating generative content can include one or more of: one or more words (e.g., a natural language prompt that is written or spoken), one or more images, one or more drawings, and / or one or more videos. Al processes can include machine learning models including neural networks. Neural networks can include transformer-based deep neural networks such as large language models (LLMs). Generative pre-trained transformer models are a type of LLM that can be effective at generating novel generative content based on a prompt. Some Al processes use a prompt that includes text to generate either different generative text, generative audio content, and / or generative visual content. Some Al processes use a prompt that includes visual content and / or an audio content to generate generative text (e.g., a transcription of audio and / or a description of the visual content). Some multi-modal Al processes use a prompt that includes multiple types of content (e.g., text, images, audio, video, and / or other sensor data) to generate generative content. A prompt sometimes also includes values for one or more parameters indicating an importance of various parts of the prompt. Some prompts include a structured set of instructions that can be understood by an Al process that include phrasing, a specified style, relevant context (e.g., starting point content and / or one or more examples), and / or a role for the Al process.

[0240] Generative content is generally based on the prompt but is not deterministically selected from pre-generated content and is, instead, generated using the prompt as a starting point. In some embodiments, pre-existing content (e.g., audio, text, and / or visual content) is used as part of the prompt for creating generative content (e.g., the pre-existing content is used as a starting point for creating the generative content). For example, a prompt could request that a block of text be summarized or rewritten in a different tone, and the output would be generative text that is summarized or written in the different tone. Similarly, a prompt could request that visual content be modified to include or exclude content specified by a prompt (e.g., removing an identified feature in the visual content, adding a feature to the visual content that is described in a prompt, changing a visual style of the visual content, and / or creating additional visual elements outside of a spatial or temporal boundary of the visual content that are based on the visual content). In some embodiments, a random or pseudo-random seed is used as part of the prompt for creating generative content (e.g., the random or pseud-random seed content is used as a starting point for creating the generative content). For example, when generating an image from a diffusion model, a random noisepattern is iteratively denoised based on the prompt to generate an image that is based on the prompt. While specific types of Al processes have been described herein, it should be understood that a variety of different Al processes could be used to generate generative content based on a prompt.

[0241] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) and associated processes that are implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device 100, device 300, or device 500.

[0242] FIGS. 6A-6AM illustrate exemplary techniques and systems for controlling a computer system based on variable characteristics of hardware inputs, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below.

[0243] FIGS. 6A, 6B, and 6C illustrate back (e.g., FIG. 6A), isometric (e.g., FIG. 6B), and front (e.g., FIG. 6D) views of computer system 600 (e.g., a mobile phone device) that includes a set of hardware buttons including first button 602A, second button 602B, third button 602C, and fourth button 602D, a set of cameras including first camera 604A, second camera 604B, third camera 604C, and 604D, and a display 606 including a touch-sensitive surface. As illustrated in FIG. 6C, the set of hardware buttons including first button 602A are arranged outside of the display on the edges of computer system 600. In FIGS. 6A and 6C- 6AM, the set of hardware buttons including first button 602A are illustrated as extending up (e.g., protruding) from the edge of device 600; however, as illustrated in FIG. 6B, in some embodiments, the set of hardware buttons including first 602A are flush with, or even inset below, the edge of device 600. It should be noted that buttons that are flush with or inset below the edge of the device are less prone to accidental activation while the device is being held.

[0244] In some embodiments, the set of hardware buttons may include different numbers of buttons, different arrangements of buttons, different types of buttons (e.g., mechanical and / or solid-state buttons, described in further detail with respect to FIG. 6C), and / or compound buttons (e.g., one or more independently-operable buttons combined into a compound form or housing). In some embodiments, the set of cameras may include different numbers of cameras, different arrangements of cameras, and / or different types of cameras. For example, the different types of cameras may include one or more wide-angle lenses, one or more telephoto lenses, and / or one or more macro lenses. For example, the different types ofcameras may vary in geometry (e.g., physical or equivalent focal lengths, such as 5 mm, 13 mm, 22 mm, 24 mm, 28 mm, 50 mm, 77 mm, 100 mm, and / or 300 mm, or f-stops of f / 1.2, f / 1.78, f / 2.2, f / 2.8, f / 3.4, and / or f / 8.4), resolution (e.g., 8 MP, 12 MP, 24 MP, 48 MP, and / or 72 MP), pixel size (e.g., 100 nm, 0.5 pm, 1.0 pm, 2.44 pm, 5 pm), and / or presence of other hardware features (e.g., dual or quad pixels, dual pixel autofocus capabilities, and / or optical image stabilization capabilities). In some embodiments, computer system 600 includes one or more sensors, such as light sensors, depth sensors, motion sensors, and / or audio sensors. In some embodiments, the methods described herein using computer system 600 are implemented using (e.g., in conjunction with computer system 600) one or more user devices (e.g., mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, and / or wearable electronic devices (e.g., smart watches)), remote devices (e.g., servers and / or network-connected devices), and / or peripheral devices (e.g., external storage drives, microphones, speakers, and / or hardware input devices). In some embodiments, computer system 600 includes one or more features of devices 100, 300, or 500 (e.g., the set of cameras can include optical sensor 164).

[0245] FIG. 6C illustrates exemplary hardware button states (A)-(E) that can be detected by computer system 600 via the set of hardware buttons (e.g., first button 602A, second button 602B, third button 602C, and / or fourth button 602D). The top panel (I) illustrates an embodiment including a pressure-sensitive button that does not physically depress when pressure is applied by a user (e.g., a solid-state button), and the bottom panel (II) illustrates an embodiment including a mechanical button, which physically depresses when pressure is applied by a user (e.g., by the user’s finger 608). In some embodiments, a pressure-sensitive button that does not physically depress (e.g., a solid-state button) includes one or more haptic (e.g., tactile) output generators that create the sensation of physically depressing the button by different amounts (e.g., as illustrated in bottom panel (II)) without the button actually moving (e.g., as illustrated in top panel (I)). In some embodiments, the solid-state button and / or the mechanical button include one or more pressure sensors, one or more capacitive (e.g., touch) sensors, and / or one or more intensity sensors (e.g., as described with respect to FIGS. 5C- 5D). In some embodiments, computer system 600 may detect hardware button states (A)-(E) based on touch proximity, the directly-measured applied pressure, and / or the amount of physical (e.g., mechanical) depression of a button. In some embodiments, the pressure (e.g., intensity) thresholds and depression thresholds described below may correspond to the same states of the hardware button, for example, such that applying the threshold pressure values PM, PA, and / or PFphysically depresses a hardware button to the respective depression levelsTM, TA, and / or TF. In some embodiments, one or more of the hardware buttons is a hybrid button that uses both intensity (e.g., pressure) sensitivity and mechanical depression to detect input characteristics, as described in further detail below. For example, one or more of hardware button states (A)-(E) are detected using the physical depression of the hybrid button (e.g., as a substitute measurement for force / pressure) and one or more of hardware button states (A)-(E) are detected using the intensity sensors of the hybrid button (e.g., directly measuring force / pressure applied to the hybrid button).

[0246] In some embodiments, the pressure (e.g., intensity) thresholds and depression thresholds described below are customizable. For example, a user can define custom values for threshold pressure values PM, PA, and / or PFand / or threshold depression levels TM, TA, and / or TFby inputting numeric values, adjusting threshold controls in a user interface (e.g., using displayed sliders, dials, or menus to adjust the thresholds up and down and / or to select between different presets), and / or inputting presses of different intensities in a testing user interface to generate one or more of the thresholds based on detected characteristics of the test presses. Accordingly, references to the hardware button states (e.g., (A)-(E)) and press types (e.g., light / partial presses and / or hard / full presses) described with respect to said thresholds are to be understood as being implemented with threshold pressure values PM, PA, and / or PFand / or threshold depression levels TM, TA, and / or TFas currently defined by computer system 600. Additionally, in some embodiments, the pressure (e.g., intensity) thresholds and depression thresholds described below differ between two or more different hardware buttons of a plurality of hardware buttons. For example, the threshold pressure values PM, PA, and / or PFand / or the threshold depression levels TM, TA, and / or TFfor first button 602A are different than the threshold pressure values PM, PA, and / or PFand / or the threshold depression levels TM, TA, and / or TFfor second button 602B. For example, a user can define different custom values for two or more different hardware buttons.

[0247] As illustrated in FIG. 6C, computer system 600 detects hardware button state (A) when a user is not using or pressing the hardware button. Accordingly, as illustrated in bottom panel (II), in hardware button state (A), the mechanical button is not (e.g., 0%) physically depressed (e.g., the mechanical button is in a “rest” position). Computer system 600 detects hardware button state (B) when a finger is detected (e.g., using the one or more capacitive sensors) near (e.g., hovering over) or resting on (e.g., touching, but not pressing) the button. As illustrated in bottom panel (II), in hardware button state (B), the mechanical button remains in the rest position. In some embodiments, computer system 600 may detecthardware buton state (B) when less than a maintenance pressure threshold PM(e.g., 5 g / cm2, 10 g / cm2, 16 g / cm2, or 20 g / cm2) is detected (e.g., using the one or more pressure sensors) and / or when a mechanical button is physically depressed less than a maintenance depression threshold TM(e.g., the least-depressed state illustrated in bottom panel (II); e.g., 2% depressed, 5% depressed, 10% depressed, or 18% depressed).

[0248] Computer system 600 detects hardware button state (C) when the user begins to press the hardware button. In some embodiments, computer system 600 detects hardware button state (C) when a user applies pressure P^ to the buton, where P^ is less than an activation pressure threshold PA(e.g., 25 g / cm2, 50 g / cm2, 75 g / cm2, 82 g / cm2, or 100 g / cm2) and, in some embodiments, greater or equal to than the maintenance pressure threshold PM. In some embodiments, computer system 600 detects hardware button state (C) when a mechanical button is physically depressed less than an activation depression threshold TA(e.g., the partially-depressed state illustrated in bottom panel (II); e.g., 15% depressed, 30% depressed, 40% depressed, 43 % depressed, or 50% depressed) and, in some embodiments, physically depressed to at least the maintenance depression threshold TM.

[0249] Computer system 600 registers a “light” or “partial” press (e.g., a first type of button press) of the hardware button when computer system 600 detects hardware button state (D). In some embodiments, computer system 600 detects hardware button state (D) when a user applies pressure P^ to the button, where P^ is less than a hard-press pressure threshold PH(e.g., 75 g / cm2, 100 g / cm2, 123 g / cm2, or 150 g / cm2) and greater than or equal to the activation pressure threshold PA. In some embodiments, computer system 600 detects hardware button state (D) when a mechanical button is physically depressed less than a hard- press depression threshold TH(e.g., the mostly-depressed state illustrated in bottom panel (II); e.g., 65% depressed, 72% depressed, 80% depressed, or 90% depressed) and physically depressed to at least the activation depression threshold TA. In some embodiments, once computer system 600 detects hardware button state (D) (e.g., “activating” the light / partial button press), computer system 600 will register hardware button state (C) (e.g., “maintaining” the light / partial button press) as a continued or maintained light / partial press (e.g., the first type of button press), for instance, until computer system 600 detects one of hardware button state (A), hardware button state (B) (e.g., releasing the light / partial button press), or hardware button state (E) (e.g., transitioning to a hard / full press, as described below). For example, once the user has activated a light / partial press by pressing a button with more than the activation pressure threshold PAand / or beyond the activation depressionthreshold TA, the user can maintain the light / partial press with a lighter touch, as long as the button is still pressed with more than the maintenance pressure threshold PMand / or beyond the maintenance depression threshold TM. In some embodiments, presses meeting a light press intensity threshold (e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 5C-5D) may be registered as light / partial-type button presses (for example, a light press intensity may correspond to hardware button state (C) and / or hardware button state (D)). As used herein, a light / partial press corresponds to a light press and / or a partial press, and a hard / full press corresponds to a hard and / or full press.

[0250] Computer system 600 registers as a “hard” or “full” press (e.g., a second type of button press) when computer system 600 detects hardware button state (E). In some embodiments, computer system 600 detects hardware button state (E) when a user applies pressure P^ to the button, where P^ is greater than or equal to the hard-press pressure threshold PH, and / or when a mechanical button is physically depressed to at least the hard- press depression threshold TH. In some embodiments, if computer system 600 detects hardware button state (E) less than a threshold duration of time (e.g., 0.1, 0.25 s, 0.5 s, 1 s, or 2 s) after detecting hardware button state (D), computer system 600 registers hardware button state (E) as a “quick” hard / full press and, in some embodiments, does not register or respond to the detection of hardware button state (D) as a light / partial press. For example, a user can provide a hard / full press without necessarily activating a light / partial press by quickly increasing pressure from activation pressure threshold PAto hard-press pressure threshold PHand / or quickly depressing the button from activation depression threshold TAto hard-press depression threshold TH. In some embodiments, presses meeting a deep press intensity threshold (e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 5C-5D) may be registered as hard / full-type button presses (for example, a deep press intensity may correspond to hardware button state (E)).

[0251] In the following, where computer system 600 is described as “detecting” the intensity of a press, computer system 600 may measure the intensity directly, based on sensor data, and / or indirectly, based on physical depression to a certain state, for instance, depending on whether first button 602A is a solid-state or physically-depressible button and / or how many distinct physical depression states first button 602A has. For example, a hard / full press may be detected either by measuring an intensity greater than hard-press pressure threshold PHand / or detecting first button 602A depressing to hard-press depression threshold TH. For example, using a hybrid button, a hard / full press is detected when the hybrid button has beenphysically depressed to hard-press depression threshold TH, a light / partial press is detected by directly measuring an intensity greater than or equal to the activation pressure threshold PA(e.g., without physically depressing to hard-press depression threshold TH), and maintenance of a light / partial press is detected by directly measuring an intensity greater or equal to than the maintenance pressure threshold PM. In some embodiments, computer system 600 provides tactile feedback using the one or more haptic (e.g., tactile) output generators when a press reaches an intensity threshold measured using the intensity sensors (e.g., the user feels a vibration and / or other tactile sensation when inputting a light / partial press) but foregoes providing tactile feedback when a press reaches an intensity threshold measured using the mechanical states (e.g., because the user can physically feel the hardware button reaching the hard / full press state).

[0252] FIGS. 6D-6E illustrate using a press of one of the hardware buttons to launch a camera user interface from a non-camera context, such as a video application. As illustrated in FIG. 6D, while displaying user interface 610 for a media player application, computer system detects input 609, a press input of first button 602A. In some embodiments, input 609 is a particular type of input, such as a hard / full press placing first button 602A into hardware button state (E) or a light / partial press placing first button 602A into hardware button state (D).

[0253] In response to detecting input 609, at FIG. 6E, computer system 600 launches camera user interface 612 of a first-party camera application of computer system 600, for example, opening and / or displaying the first-party camera application. In some embodiments, computer system 600 launches camera user interface 612 in response to press inputs of first button 602A such as 609 if camera user interface 612 is associated with first button 602A and will launch a different camera user interface (e.g., 1046) if the other camera is associated with first button 602 A. For example, the user can select between a plurality of camera utilities (e.g., user interfaces and / or applications) to associate with first button 602A using a settings menu for computer system 600 (e.g., as described in more detail with respect to FIGS. 10A- 10W). In some embodiments, computer system 600 launches camera user interface 612, the associated camera utility, in response to press inputs of first button 602A, such as 609 if the press input is detected while displaying a non-camera user interface, such as user interface 610 for a media player application, a home or lock screen of computer system 600, an application without a camera utility (e.g., a game, a clock application, and / or a podcast application), and / or a non-camera user interface of an application that includes an embeddedcamera utility (e.g., a social media application, a financial application, a creative application, and / or a messaging application).

[0254] As illustrated in FIG. 6E, camera user interface 612 includes touch controls 612A- 612G for navigating, using, assisting with, and / or changing settings of the camera user interface via the touch-sensitive surface of display 606, and camera preview 614, which represents a portion of the field-of-view of the set of cameras of computer system 600, e.g., as it would currently be captured in a photo or video capture. Capture mode affordance 612A is a menu (e.g., a sliding toolbar) for selecting between capture modes including a standard photo capture mode (e.g., a mode for capturing photo media that are not designated for display with synthetic depth-of-field effects), a portrait capture mode (e.g., a mode for capturing photo media that are designated for display with synthetic depth-of-field effects, lighting effects, and / or other post-processing effects), a panoramic photo capture mode (e.g., a mode for capturing photos from different positions and / or angles that are stitched together to create a single, larger form -factor image), a standard video capture mode (e.g., a mode for capturing video media that are not designated for display with synthetic depth-of-field effects), and / or a cinematic video capture mode (e.g., a mode for capturing video media that are designated for display with synthetic depth-of-field effects, lighting effects, and / or other post-processing effects). Camera selection affordance 612B is a software button for switching between capture using a front-facing (e.g., environment-facing) camera (e.g., first camera 604A, second camera 604B, and / or third camera 604C) and using a back-facing (e.g., user-facing) camera (e.g., fourth camera 604D). Shutter affordance 612C is a software button that can be selected to initiate the capture of media. Captured media icon 612D is a selectable thumbnail icon that previews captured media and can be selected to view captured media (e.g., in a media viewing or media library user interface). Zoom affordance 612E is a menu (e.g., a platter of multiple software buttons) for changing the capture magnification and / or switching between cameras / lenses with different magnification. Multi-frame photo affordance 612F is a software button for toggling between capturing single-frame / still photo capture and capturing photo media with a limited duration (e.g., 1, 3, and / or 5 seconds), for example, including content from before and / or after a capture input is detected that can be displayed in sequence for a “live” effect. Camera flash affordance 612G is a software button for selecting a camera flash mode (e.g., on, off, or automatic).

[0255] FIGS. 6F-6I illustrate displaying an indicator of one or more characteristics of an input via the hardware button, which responds to changes in intensity of the input, changes inlocation of the input, and, as illustrated in FIG. 61, morphs into a settings control element when the intensity of the input meets light / partial press criteria (e.g., hardware button state (D)). At FIG. 61, the computer system additionally provides a tactile (e.g., haptic) output when the intensity of the input meets light / partial press criteria.

[0256] As illustrated in FIG. 6F, while displaying camera user interface 612, computer system 600 detects input 616, where finger 608 is resting on the surface of first button 602 A but not applying enough pressure to qualify as a light / partial press (e.g., first button 602A is in hardware button state (B)). In response to detecting input 616, computer system 600 displays contact indicator 618. Contact indicator 618 is displayed as a cut-out from camera user interface 612 (e.g., blocking out a portion of camera user interface 612) extending into display 606 from the edge region of display 606 that is adjacent to first button 602A. Contact indicator 618 indicates certain characteristics of input 616. As shown in FIG. 6F, as finger 608 is resting on the left side of first button 602A, computer system 600 displays contact indicator 618 below the left side of first button 602A (e.g., indicating the current location of input 616), and as first button 602A is in hardware button state (B), computer system 600 displays contact indicator 618 as a relatively small cut-out (e.g., indicating the current intensity of input 616).

[0257] As illustrated in FIG. 6G, computer system 600 detects input 616 beginning to move, for example, detecting movement component 616A via one or more touch sensors of first button 602 A. Accordingly, computer system 600 animates contact indicator 618 moving to the right (e.g., in the direction of movement component 616A) by an amount similar to the amount traveled by movement component 616A, for instance, deforming the cut-out shape of contact indicator 618 during the animation to depict the movement. For example, computer system 600 animates contact indicator 618 moving to remain below finger 608 as it moves to the right side of first button 602A.

[0258] In some embodiments, if detected movement component 616A exceeds a threshold magnitude, computer system 600 proceeds as discussed below with respect to FIG. 6J, displaying settings control 622 and displaying camera user interface 612 in a “quiet” mode. For example, a swipe input across the full length or a majority of the length of first button 602A along the edge of display 606 can be used additionally or alternatively to a light / partial press of first button 602A as discussed with respect to FIGS. 6I-6J.

[0259] As illustrated in FIG. 6H, computer system 600 detects input 616 increasing in intensity, transitioning from hardware button state (B) to hardware button state (C) without yet qualifying as a light / partial press. Accordingly, computer system 600 animates contact indicator 618 growing, indicating the increasing intensity, while remaining located below finger 608 on the right side of first button 602A. In some embodiments, in response to detecting input 616 decreasing in intensity (e.g., transitioning from hardware button state (C) to hardware button state (B)), computer system 600 shrinks contact indicator 618, and in response to detecting input 616 ending (e.g., transitioning to hardware button state (A)), computer system 600 stops displaying contact indicator 618.

[0260] As illustrated in FIGS. 6I-6J, computer system detects input 616 increasing in intensity past a light / partial press threshold, e.g., transitioning to hardware button state (D). In response to this light / partial press of first button 602A, computer system 600 displays settings control 622 for a zoom setting of camera user interface 612. In some embodiments, the zoom setting is associated with first button 602A as described with respect to FIGS. 10A- 10W, below, when input 616 is detected.

[0261] As illustrated in FIG. 61, before displaying settings control 622, computer system 600 displays contact indicator 618 growing further in size and morphing into the shape of settings control 622, a tab-shaped cut-out from camera user interface 612 extending into display 606 from the location of first button 602A. Additionally, computer system 600 provides tactile output 620 indicating that light / partial press of first button 602A has been detected, for example, providing a vibration or a tactile response simulating the feeling of lightly pressing or clicking a button at the location of first button 602 A. As illustrated in FIGS. 61-6 J, computer system 600 also transitions camera user interface 612 to a “quiet” or “ready to capture” mode in response to the light / partial press of first button 602A. As illustrated in FIG. 61, computer system 600 fades out (e.g., increases the transparency of and / or visually deemphasizes) several of the touch controls included in camera user interface 612, including capture mode affordance 612A, camera selection affordance 612B, captured media icon 612D, multi -frame photo affordance 612F, and camera flash affordance 612G. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays removal of one or more of the touch controls in other manners, such as animating the removed touch controls sliding off of display 606. For the “quiet” or “ready to capture” mode of camera user interface 612, computer system also begins displaying levels affordance 612H, a histogram indicating the tonal range and content of camera preview 614, and a capture guidance grid displayed over camera preview 614.

[0262] FIG. 6J illustrates displaying a settings control element for a zoom setting of the camera user interface in response to the input meeting light / partial press criteria (along with an inset illustrating an alternative embodiment of the settings control element).

[0263] As illustrated in FIG. 6J, settings control 622 for the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 includes text indicating the current zoom level (“IX”), an icon representing the zoom setting, and a representation of a zoom scale. In particular, the representation of the zoom scale includes a plurality of tick marks representing ordered zoom levels in intervals of 0. lx zoom. As illustrated in FIG. 6J, the representation of the zoom scale includes a portion of an overall zoom scale with tick marks representing 0.6x to 1.9x zoom, and the tick mark representing the current zoom level of l.Ox is displayed at a center point of settings control 622 (e.g., centered within the cut-out tab of settings control 622). In some embodiments, computer system 600 centers the text indicating the current zoom level at the current tick mark, outside of the cut-out tab region of settings control 622, and in some embodiments, as illustrated by the side panel of FIG. 6J, computer system 600 displays the text indicating the current zoom level inside the cut-out tab of settings control 622 (e.g., to the side of the representation of the zoom scale). As illustrated in FIG. 6J, the representation of the zoom scale is oriented such that the zoom levels represented by the tick marks increase going from left to right with respect to the view of the environment included in camera preview 614. In particular, the tick mark representing 0.6x is located below the edge of first button 602A closest to the set of cameras (e.g., considered the “top” of the device), and the tick mark representing 1.9x is located below the edge of first button 602A the regions further away from the set of cameras (e.g., considered the “bottom” of the device). Settings control 622, and, in particular, the representation of the zoom scale, are described in greater detail with respect to FIGS. 14A-14Z, below.

[0264] As illustrated in FIG. 6J1, in some embodiments, settings control 622 is displayed with an appearance that simulates a curved, rotatable dial. The left panels illustrated in FIG. 6J1 represent settings control 622 as displayed via display 606 and the right panels represent corresponding top-down views of simulated dial 622’, which is simulated as curving outwards from the surface of display 606. Accordingly, to create the appearance of simulated dial 622’, system 600 gradually blurs, darkens, fades, and / or otherwise obscures the representation of the zoom scale (e.g., described in further detail below) as the zoom scale approaches the edges (e.g., the left and right edges where simulated dial 622’ has an appearance that appears to curve away from the user and into the surface of display 606)and / or distorts the representation of the zoom scale based on a projection of the apparent curve of simulated dial 622’ onto the surface of display 606, for instance, decreasing the spacing between tick marks as the zoom scale approaches the edges to simulate the foreshortening of placing the tick marks on the physically curved surface of simulated dial 622’. As illustrated in FIG. 6J1, the visual distortion simulating the curved dial is represented by the crosshatching at the edges of settings control 622. As illustrated in FIG. 6J1, when adjusting the zoom setting using settings control 622 (e.g., as described in detail herein), system 600 simulates input 613, a movement input swiping right-to-left along settings control 622, as an input rotating simulated dial 622’ clockwise, moving the previously-centered tick mark (marked with an arrow in FIG. 6J1) to the left and adjusting the appearance of settings control 622 to simulate the resulting position of simulated dial 622’.

[0265] FIG. 6K illustrates the display of settings control 622 at different orientation states of computer system 600. For example, using one or more motion or orientation sensors, computer system 600 detects how computer system 600 is being held with respect to the environment. In the Portrait 1 orientation state, computer system 600 is held in an “upright” portrait orientation with first button 602A to the right relative to the field of view of first camera 604A, second camera 604B, and / or third camera 604C; in the Portrait 2 orientation state, computer system 600 is held in an “upside-down” portrait orientation with first button 602A to the left relative to the field of view of first camera 604A, second camera 604B, and / or third camera 604C; in the Landscape 1 orientation state (e.g., the orientation state depicted in FIGS. 6E-6J and 6L-6V), computer system 600 is held in a “right-handed” portrait orientation with first button 602A at the top relative to the field of view of first camera 604 A, second camera 604B, and / or third camera 604C; and in the Landscape 2 orientation state, is held in a “left-handed” portrait orientation with first button 602A at the bottom relative to the field of view of first camera 604A, second camera 604B, and / or third camera 604C. As illustrated in FIG. 6K, in each of the different orientation states, computer system 600 displays settings control 622 at a consistent position near the location of first button 602A (e.g., a hardware-locked position on the display), such that in Portrait 1, settings control 622 appears at the lower right edge of camera preview 614 (e.g., and / or camera user interface 612); in Portrait 2, settings control 622 appears at the upper left edge of camera preview 614; in Landscape 1, settings control 622 appears at the top edge of camera preview 614; and in Landscape 2, settings control 622 appears at the bottom edge of camera preview 614. Additionally, in each of the different orientation states, computer system 600 orients therepresentation of the zoom scale in the same manner with respect to first button 602A, such that the zoom levels represented by the tick marks increase going in the direction from the set of cameras towards the charging port of computer system 600, whether that direction is up, down, left, or right with respect to camera preview 614. In some embodiments, computer system 600 rotates some elements of the camera user interface and / or settings control 622 as the orientation state changes. In particular, as illustrated in FIG. 6K, computer system 600 rotates the text indicating the current zoom level (“IX”), the text included in zoom affordance 612E, and levels affordance 612H with respect to the hardware such that those elements appear upright with respect to the camera preview.

[0266] FIGS. 6L-6T illustrate adjusting the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 and capturing media in response to various inputs, including movement inputs (e.g., swipes, flicks, and / or directional taps) detected while displaying settings control 622 and press inputs of first button 602A.

[0267] At FIG. 6L, while displaying settings control 622 for the zoom setting of camera user interface 612, computer system 600 detects a movement input, such as movement component 616B of input 616 where finger 608 swipes from right to left along the surface of first button 602A and / or touch input 624A, a right-to-left swipe gesture (e.g., a touch with movement) directed to settings control 622 on the touch-sensitive surface of display 606. In some embodiments, once settings control 622 is displayed in response to the light / partial press of first button 602A (e.g., once the intensity of input 616 passes the light / partial press threshold), computer system 600 continues displaying settings control 622 and displaying camera user interface 612 in the “quiet” mode, and remains responsive to detected movement inputs, after the intensity of input 616 drops below the light / partial press intensity. For example, as illustrated in FIGS. 6L, movement component 616A is detected while the intensity of input 616 has lessened, placing first button 602A into hardware button state (C). In some embodiments, input 616 can be fully lifted off of first button 602A (e.g., in hardware button state (A)) while detecting touch input 624A via settings control 622 on the touch- sensitive surface of display 606. In some embodiments, computer system 600 continues displaying settings control 622 and displaying camera user interface 612 in the “quiet” mode and remains responsive to detected movement inputs for at least a threshold period of time (e.g., 0.25s, 0.3s, 0.5s, or Is) after contact with first button 602A and / or with settings control 622 on the touch-sensitive surface of display 606 lifts off, allowing the user to briefly lift and replace finger 608 without needing to provide another light / partial press.

[0268] At FIG. 6L, computer system 600 adjusts the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 based on the detected movement input (e.g., movement component 616B and / or touch input 624A), increasing the zoom level (e.g., zooming in) from lx to 3.4x zoom as shown by the increased magnification of the field-of-view of the environment displayed in camera preview 614. In particular, adjusting to increase the zoom level (e.g., zooming in) corresponds to the direction of the detected movement input with respect to the displayed representation of the zoom scale, and adjusting the zoom level by a magnitude of 1.4x corresponds to the magnitude of the detected movement input with respect to the displayed representation of the zoom scale. For example, computer system 600 makes the adjustment based on the detected movement input as if settings control 622 were a physical zoom dial (e.g., with the same or a proportional scale to the displayed representation of the zoom scale, such as simulated rotatable dial 622’, illustrated in FIG. 6J1) being rotated by input 616 and / or touch input 624 A.

[0269] In some embodiments, adjusting the zoom level includes performing an optical zoom (e.g., switching between capturing camera data using first camera 604 A, second camera 604B, and / or third camera 604C for the different magnifications produced by each different lens), performing a digital zoom (e.g., digitally cropping the portion of the field-of-view of the environment represented in camera preview 614), or a combination of both an optical zoom and a digital zoom.

[0270] As illustrated in FIG. 6L, upon adjusting the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 to 3.4x magnification, computer system 600 displays the representation of the zoom scale with the tick mark representing 3.4x zoom at the center point of settings control 622, surrounded by tick marks representing 1.8x to 6.6x zoom, and additionally updates the text indicating the current zoom level in settings control 622 to 3.4x. In some embodiments, computer system 600 additionally updates the text included in zoom affordance 612E to reflect the current zoom level. In some embodiments, computer system 600 animates the representation of the zoom scale sliding to the left along with movement component 616A and / or touch input 624A (e.g., as described further with respect to FIGS. 14A-14Z), for instance, with the same speed / acceleration or a proportionate speed / acceleration as movement component 616B and / or touch input 624, as if the representation of the zoom scale were being physically dragged. In some embodiments, computer system 600 updates the text of settings control 622 and / or displays camera preview 614 at the zoom levels represented bythe tick marks as they move past the center of settings control 622, providing a “live” preview of the zoom adjustment during the movement inputs.

[0271] FIGS. 6M-6N illustrate adjusting the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 in response to detecting a “flick” movement via first button 602A and / or the touch-sensitive surface of display 606, also described in detail with respect to FIGS. 14A-14Z. At FIG. 6M, computer system 600 detects a movement input, such as movement component 616C of input 616 swiping further from right to left along the surface of first button 602 A (e.g., while in hardware button state (B)) and / or touch input 624B, a further right-to-left swipe gesture directed to settings control 622 on the touch-sensitive surface of display 606, and begins adjusting the zoom setting as described with respect to FIG. 6L, increasing the zoom level from 3.4x zoom to 4. Ox zoom. At FIG. 6N, without first slowing down and / or stopping the right-to-left movement of movement component 616C and / or touch input 624B, the user lifts off of (e.g., ceases contact with) first button 602A and / or the touch-sensitive surface of display 606, producing a right-to-left “flick” movement. Computer system 600 thus detects a flick movement based on detecting a lift-off from first button 602A and / or the touch-sensitive surface of display 606 coupled with movement near (e.g., before and / or after) the time of the lift-off. A flick input is generally differentiated from a drag input because a flick input ends (e.g., based on lift off of the input) with more than a threshold amount of movement while a drag input ends (e.g., based on lift off of the input or an end of motion of the input) with less than the threshold amount of movement. Operations that are performed in response to detecting a flick input typically include a component of the operation that is performed after the flick input ends (e.g., based on simulated inertia based on the movement that was detected when the flick input ended).

[0272] As illustrated in FIG. 6N, in response to detecting the right-to-left flick movement, computer system 600 increases the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 to 8. Ox, displaying the representation of the zoom scale with the tick mark representing 8. Ox at the center point of settings control 622. As described further with respect to FIGS. 14A-14Z, in some embodiments, the adjustment to the zoom setting made after detecting the lift-off (e.g., zooming in from 4. Ox to 8. Ox) is a “snapping” adjustment that adjusts to the next zoom value in a predetermined set of zoom values (e.g., 8. Ox, 2. Ox, l.Ox, and 0.5x) in response to the flick, and in some embodiments, the adjustment to the zoom setting made after detecting the lift-off (e.g., zooming in from 4. Ox to 8. Ox) is based on simulated physics, for instance, as though the flick gesture were transferring momentum to a physical zoom dial that keepsspinning to 8. Ox. Accordingly, the user can zoom in to 8. Ox zoom without needing to provide a movement input of a commensurate distance (e.g., as described with respect to FIG. 6L). Following the lift-off detected at FIG. 6N, computer system 600 continues displaying settings control 622 and displaying camera user interface 612 in the “quiet” mode for at least the threshold period of time (e.g., 0.25s, 0.3s, 0.5s, or Is).

[0273] At FIG. 60, while continuing to display settings control 622 (e.g., within the threshold period of time after lift-off), computer system 600 detects resumed contact with first button 602A (e.g., hardware button state (B)) and / or with settings control 622 via the touch-sensitive surface of display 606 detects a subsequent movement input, such as movement component 616D of input 616 where finger 608 swipes from left to right along the surface of first button 602A and / or touch input 624C, a left-to-right swipe gesture (e.g., a touch with movement) directed to settings control 622 on the touch-sensitive surface of display 606. As contact with first button 602A and / or with settings control 622 is reestablished within the threshold period of time after lift-off, the intensity of input 616 does not need to exceed the light / partial press threshold (e.g., as described with respect to FIGS. 61-6 J) again before movement inputs are detected. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 60, movement component 616D is detected while first button 602A is in hardware button state (B), e.g., with finger 608 just resting on the surface of the button.

[0274] As illustrated in FIG. 60, in response to detecting the subsequent left-to-right movement input, computer system 600 adjusts the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 based on the detected movement input, decreasing the zoom level (e.g., zooming out) from 8x to 2.8x zoom. As discussed with respect to FIG. 6L, decreasing the zoom level to 2.8x zoom corresponds to the direction and magnitude of the detected movement input with respect to the displayed representation of the zoom scale, for example, adjusting the zoom level as though the movement inputs were physically dragging the tick mark representing 2.8x zoom in the representation of the zoom scale towards the center of settings control 622.

[0275] FIGS. 6P-6Q illustrate adjusting the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 in response to detecting a flick movement, as described above with respect to FIGS. 6M-6N. At FIG. 6P, computer system 600 detects a left-to-right movement input such as movement component 616E of input 616 and / or touch input 624D, and begins adjusting the zoom setting, decreasing the zoom level to 2.4x zoom. At FIG. 6Q, while continuing the left-to- right motion of the movement input(s), the user lifts off of first button 602A and / or the touch- sensitive surface of display 606, producing a left-to-right flick movement. As illustrated inFIG. 6Q, in response to detecting the left-to-right flick movement, computer system 600 decreases the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 to 2. Ox, for example, based on simulating a transfer of momentum from the flick movement and / or based on 2. Ox being the next predetermined “snapping” value in the direction of movement.

[0276] FIGS. 6R-6S illustrate adjusting the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 in response to detecting a directional tap input via first button 602A and / or the touch-sensitive surface of display 606. At FIG. 6R, while continuing to display settings control 622, computer system 600 detects input 616 briefly contacting and then lifting off of the right side of first button 602A and / or touch input 624E briefly contacting and then lifting off of the right side of settings control 622. As the right side of the representation of the zoom scale corresponds to higher zoom values, in response to detecting the tap inputs, computer system 600 adjusts the zoom setting of camera user interface 612, increasing the zoom level from 2. Ox zoom to 8. Ox zoom, the next predetermined “snapping” value in the direction of the tap. At FIG. 6S, while continuing to display settings control 622, computer system 600 detects input 616 briefly contacting and then lifting off of the left side of first button 602A and / or touch input 624F briefly contacting and then lifting off of the left side of settings control 622. As the left side of the representation of the zoom scale corresponds to lower zoom values, in response to detecting the tap inputs, computer system 600 adjusts the zoom setting of camera user interface 612, decreasing the zoom level from 8. Ox zoom to 2. Ox zoom, the next predetermined “snapping” value in the direction of the tap. Following the lift-off of the tap inputs at FIGS. 6R-6S, computer system 600 continues displaying settings control 622 and displaying camera user interface 612 in the “quiet” mode for at least the threshold period of time (e.g., 0.25s, 0.3s, 0.5s, or Is).

[0277] At FIG. 6T, computer system 600 detects lift-off from of button 602A (e.g., ending input 616) and / or settings control 622 on the touch-sensitive surface of display 606. As discussed above, in some embodiments, computer system 600 continues displaying settings control 622 and displaying camera user interface 612 in the “quiet” mode for at least the threshold period of time (e.g., 0.25s, 0.3s, 0.5s, or Is) after lift-off. If contact with button 602A and / or settings control 622 on the touch-sensitive surface of display 606 is not reestablished within the threshold period of time, computer system 600 stops displaying settings control 622 and reverts camera user interface 612 to a default mode (e.g., the initial appearance of camera user interface 612 described with respect to FIG. 6E) as illustrated in FIG. 6U, ceasing display of levels affordance 612H and the capture guidance grid and re-displaying capture mode affordance 612A, camera selection affordance 612B, captured media icon 612D, multi-frame photo affordance 612F, and camera flash affordance 612G.Alternatively, in some embodiments, computer system 600 stops displaying settings control 622 and reverts camera user interface 612 to the default mode as illustrated in FIG. 6U in response to a separate input dismissing settings control 622. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 6T, the separate input dismissing settings control 622 may include touch input 626 A, a swipe gesture moving across settings control 622 towards the outside edge of display 606, or touch input 626B, a touch input (e.g., a tap or press) directed to a portion of camera user interface 612 outside of the region of settings control 622.

[0278] As illustrated in FIG. 6U, after computer system 600 ceases displaying settings control 622 and returns camera user interface 612 to the default mode, the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 remains set to 2x zoom, the zoom level selected via settings control 622.

[0279] At FIG. 6U, while camera user interface 612 is in the default mode and settings control 622 is not displayed, computer system 600 detects input 628, a press input that places first button 602A into hardware button state (E) (e.g., applying intensity that exceeds a hard / full press intensity threshold), qualifying as a hard / full press. In some embodiments, computer system 600 does not display contact indicator 618, display settings control 622, and / or display camera user interface 612 in the “quiet” mode in response to input 628 if input 628 is a “quick” hard / full press. For example, a quick hard / full press places first button 602A into hardware button state (E) less than a first threshold duration of time after placing first button 602A into hardware button state (B) (e.g., after initiating contact with first button 602A) and / or less than a second threshold duration of time after placing first button 602A into hardware button state (D) (e.g., after reaching a light / partial press state).

[0280] In response to detecting input 628 (e.g., a hard / full press of first button 602A), computer system 600 initiates capturing media. As illustrated in FIGS. 6U-6V, the media is captured at 2x zoom, the zoom level selected via settings control 622. At FIG. 6V, computer system 600 detects lift-off from first button 602A within a threshold period of time (e.g., 0.5s, 0.75s, Is, or 1.5s) after input 628 qualifies as a hard / full press (e.g., input 628 is a quick press, as discussed in more detail with respect to FIGS. 8A-8P). Accordingly, computer system 600 captures photo media in response to input 628, updating captured media icon 612D to display a thumbnail of the captured photo media.

[0281] Although FIGS. 6L-6V depict adjusting a zoom setting of camera user interface 612 based on movement inputs while computer system 600 is in the Landscape 1 orientation state, it is to be understood that the techniques and user interfaces described with respect to FIGS. 6L-6V can be likewise applied to perform operations based on movement inputs in other orientation states. For example, FIGS. 6W-6AD illustrate controlling the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 using movement inputs while computer system 600 is in the Landscape 2 orientation state, and FIGS. 6AE-6AM illustrate controlling other operations (e.g., adjusting different settings of camera user interface 612) using movement inputs while in the Portrait 1 orientation state.

[0282] At FIG. 6W, computer system 600 detects input 630 placing first button 602 A into hardware button state (D), qualifying as a light / partial press of first button 602A. In response to input 630 (and / or in response to a full swipe of first button 602A, as described above), computer system 600 displays settings control 622 for the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 and additionally displays camera user interface 612 in the “quiet” mode, as described with respect to FIGS. 6F-6J. As described with respect to FIG. 6K, at FIG. 6W, computer system 600 displays settings control 622 at the edge of display 606 near the location of first button 602A, which, while in the Landscape 2 orientation state, appears at the bottom left edge of camera preview 614. As illustrated in FIG. 6W, the representation of the zoom scale is oriented such that the zoom levels represented by the tick marks increase going from right to left with respect to the view of the environment included in camera preview 614. Although the orientation of the representation of the zoom scale in FIG. 6W is oriented opposite to the orientation illustrated in FIG. 6J with respect to the environment, the representation of the zoom scale is oriented consistently with respect to the hardware of computer system 600 regardless of the orientation state. Specifically, computer system 600 displays the tick mark representing the lowest displayed zoom level near the edge of first button 602A closest to the set of cameras (e.g., the “top” of the device) and the tick mark representing the highest displayed zoom level is located near the edge of first button 602A closest to, e.g., a charging port of computer system 600 (e.g., the “bottom” of the device). As described with respect to FIG. 6K, at FIG. 6W, computer system 600 displays the text indicating the current zoom level (“2X”), the text included in zoom affordance 612E, and levels affordance 612H oriented upright with respect to the environment.

[0283] At FIG. 6X, while displaying settings control 622, computer system 600 detects movement component 630A of input 630 via first button 602A (and / or a flick, directional tap,and / or a swipe directed to settings control 622 via the touch-sensitive surface of display 606, as discussed above), where finger 608 swipes from left to right along the surface of first button 602A. As illustrated in FIG. 6X, computer system 600 adjusts the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 based on movement component 630A, e.g., as described with respect to FIG. 6L. In particular, computer system 600 increases the zoom level (e.g., zooming in) from 2x to 3.4x, corresponding to the magnitude of movement component 630 A and the direction of movement component 630A with respect to the displayed representation of the zoom scale. Accordingly, although movement component 630A is a movement from left to right and movement component 616B (in FIG. 6L) is a movement from right to left, e.g., with respect to the view of the environment included in camera preview 614, both movement component 630 A and movement component 616B increase the zoom setting of camera user interface 612, as both movement components correspond to the same direction with respect to the displayed representation of the zoom scale (e.g., dragging the higher zoom level tick marks towards the center of settings control 622).

[0284] At FIG. 6Y, while displaying settings control 622, computer system 600 detects the input 630 transitioning first button 602A into hardware button state (E), e.g., increasing in intensity past the hard / full press threshold. As discussed with respect to FIG. 6U, in response to detecting the hard / full press of first button 602A, computer system 600 initiates media capture. As illustrated in FIG. 6Y, in response to detecting input 630 maintaining hardware button state (E) for at least a threshold period of time (e.g., 0.5s, 0.75s, Is, or 1.5s), computer system 600 initiates capture of video media (e.g., as discussed in more detail with respect to FIGS. 8A-8P). While capturing video media, computer system 600 displays camera user interface 612 in a video capture mode, in particular, changing the aspect ratio of camera preview 614 to a wider format, ceasing display of levels affordance 612H, updating the appearance of shutter affordance 612C to appear as a stop recording button, and displaying capture timer 6121, as discussed in more detail with respect to FIGS. 8A-8P. Additionally, as computer system 600 detected the hard / full press of first button 602A while displaying settings control 622, computer system 600 continues displaying settings control 622.

[0285] At FIG. 6Z, while capturing the video media and displaying settings control 622, computer system 600 detects movement component 630B of input 630 via first button 602 A (and / or a swipe directed to settings control 622 via the touch-sensitive surface of display 606, as discussed above), where finger 608 swipes from right to left along the surface of first button 602A. As illustrated in FIG. 6Z, computer system 600 adjusts the zoom setting ofcamera user interface 612 based on movement component 630B, decreasing the zoom level of the ongoing video media capture from 3.4x to 2x. In some embodiments, as input 630 was not lifted off of first button 602A following the hard / full press initiating the video capture, computer system 600 responds to movement component 630B while first button 602A is in hardware button state (B), without needing to detect another light / partial press before adjusting the zoom setting.

[0286] At FIG. 6AA, while capturing the video media, computer system 600 detects lift-off from button 602A (e.g., ending input 630) and, as described above, continues displaying settings control 622 for at least a threshold period of time after lift-off. At FIG. 6AB, after the threshold period of time has elapsed without detecting re-established contact with first button 602A and / or settings control 622 on the touch-sensitive surface of display 606, computer system 600 ceases displaying settings control 622, as described above with respect to FIG. 6U, and continues capturing the video media at 2. Ox zoom. As illustrated in FIG. 6AB, as video capture is ongoing, computer system 600 does not revert camera user interface 612 to the default mode following the lift-off, instead remaining in the video capture mode.

[0287] At FIG. 6AC, after ceasing to display settings control 622, computer system 600 detects input 632, including movement component 632 A and / or movement component 632B, via first button 602A. As settings control 622 is not currently displayed and input 632 is insufficient (e.g., in intensity) to place first button 602A into hardware button state (D) (and / or movement component 632A and movement component 632B are insufficient in magnitude to qualify as a full swipe of first button 602A), computer system 600 does not display settings control 622 or adjust the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 based on movement component 632A and / or movement component 632B. In some embodiments, if input 632 qualified as a light / partial press, computer system 600 would re-display settings control 622 and adjust the zoom setting in response to subsequent movement inputs while continuing the video media capture. In some embodiments, computer system 600 will display contact indicator 618 (e.g., as described with respect to FIGS. 6F-6H) in response to input 632 while the video capture is ongoing.

[0288] At FIG. 6AD, computer system 600 detects input 634, a press input that places first button 602A into hardware button state (E), qualifying as a hard / full press (and, in some embodiments, a quick hard / full press, which does not result in displaying the contact indicator 618 and / or settings control 622). In response to input 634, computer system 600 ends the capture of the video media. Alternatively, in some embodiments, computer system600 ends the capture of video media in response to detecting touch input 636 directed to shutter affordance 612C via the touch-sensitive surface of display 606. Upon ending the capture of the video media, computer system 600 will revert camera user interface 612 to the default mode and return the aspect ratio of camera preview 614 and the appearance of shutter affordance 612C to the state illustrated in FIG. 6W, cease displaying capture timer 6121, and re-display capture mode affordance 612A, camera selection affordance 612B, captured media icon 612D, multi-frame photo affordance 612F, and camera flash affordance 612G.

[0289] FIGS. 6AE-6AM illustrate computer system 600 displaying settings control 622 for settings of camera user interface 612 other than the zoom setting, in particular, a depth-of- field setting, a focus setting, a filter setting, and a capture mode setting. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays settings control 622 for a respective settings of camera user interface 612 as illustrated in FIGS. 6AE-6AM in response to a light / partial press of first button 602A or a full swipe of first button 602A, such as described with respect to displaying settings control 622 for the zoom setting of camera user interface 612 in FIGS. 6E- 6J. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays settings control 622 for a respective setting of camera user interface 612 in response to a light / partial press or full swipe when the respective setting is currently associated with first button 602A, for example, as described in further detail with respect to FIGS. 10A-10W.

[0290] As illustrated in FIGS. 6AE-6AF, computer system 600 displays settings control 622 for a simulated depth-of-field setting of camera user interface 612. For example, the simulated depth-of-field setting of camera user interface 612 controls visual effects simulating the depth-of-field of a camera or lens with a particular aperture setting (e.g., an f- stop value, which defines a ratio between the focal length of a photographic lens and the aperture size, such as f / 1.8, f / 2.8, or f / 8), such that portions of the environment within the simulated depth-of-field’ s range (e.g., the current focal plane or focal range) appear in focus (e.g., sharp) in camera preview 614 and / or in captured media, while portions of the environment outside of the simulated depth-of-field’ s range appear out of focus (e.g., blurry). In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays camera preview 614 with the simulated depth-of-field effects applied while displaying settings control 622 for the simulated depth- of-field setting (e.g., in response to a light / partial press and / or full swipe of first button 602A), while camera user interface 612 is in a particular capture mode (e.g., a portrait or cinematic capture mode, for instance, selected using capture mode affordance 612A), and / or while capture of depth information is enabled (e.g., indicated in FIGS. 6AE-6AF by thedisplay of depth capture affordance 612J, an f-stop icon that indicates depth information is being captured and / or can be selected to toggle the display of the simulated depth-of-field effects). As illustrated in FIGS. 6AE-6AF, settings control 622 for the simulated depth-of- field setting of camera user interface 612 includes text indicating the current f-stop value, an icon representing the simulated depth-of-field setting, and a representation of an f-stop scale. In particular, the representation of the f-stop scale includes a plurality of tick marks representing ordered f-stop values in intervals of f / 0.1, with f-stop values for narrower depths-of-field (e.g., f / 1.8) are displayed closer to the set of cameras and f-stop values for wider depths-of-field (e.g., f / 8.0) are displayed further from the set of cameras.

[0291] At FIG. 6AE, while displaying settings control 622 for the simulated depth-of-field setting of camera user interface 612, computer system 600 detects a downwards movement input (e.g., moving away from the set of cameras) such as movement input 640 directed to first button 602 A and / or touch input 642 directed to settings control 622 on the touch- sensitive surface of display 606. For example, movement input 640 and / or touch input 642 may include swipe / drag movements (e.g., movements remaining in contact with first button 602A and / or display 606, as described with respect to FIGS. 6L and 60), flick movements (e.g., as described with respect to FIGS. 6M-6N and 6P-6Q), and / or directional tap inputs (e.g., as described with respect to FIGS. 6R-6S) directed towards the lower region of first button 602A and / or settings control 622 (e.g., the regions further away from the set of cameras).

[0292] In response to movement input 640 and / or touch input 642, computer system 600 adjusts the simulated depth-of-field setting of camera user interface 612 to an f-stop value of f / 1.8. As illustrated in FIG. 6AE, at the f-stop value of f / 1.8 (e.g., a relatively narrow depth- of-field), computer system 600 displays camera preview 614 with the midground (e.g., including the woman sitting at the table) in focus and selectively blurs the foreground (e.g., including the coffee cup) and background (e.g., including the person standing behind the table and the mountains in the distance), with the blurring represented in these figures by crosshatching. Additionally, computer system displays the representation of the f-stop scale with the tick mark representing f / 1.8 at the center point of settings control 622 and updates the text indicating the current f-stop value in settings control 622 to “1.8.” As described with respect to FIG. 6L, in some embodiments, computer system 600 animates the representation of the f-stop scale being dragged down along with the movement inpu...

Claims

Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 CLAIMS What is claimed is:

1. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a first input device: detecting, via the first input device, a first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a first set of criteria, performing a first operation, wherein the first set of criteria includes: a first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a first input intensity that exceeds a first threshold intensity; and a second criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes more than a threshold amount of movement of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device satisfies a second set of criteria different from the first set of criteria, performing a second operation different from the first operation, wherein the second set of criteria includes a third criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a second input intensity that exceeds a second threshold intensity that is higher than the first threshold intensity.

2. The method of claim 1, wherein: performing the first operation includes changing an operation setting to a respective value; and performing the second operation includes performing the second operation based on a current value of the operation setting, wherein, in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfied the first set of criteria prior to satisfying the second set of criteria, the current value of the operation setting is the respective value.

3. The method of any one of claims 1-2, wherein: performing the first operation includes changing a media capture setting; and 1615614854 401Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 performing the second operation includes capturing media based on the media capture setting.

4. The method of claim 3, wherein the media capture setting includes a zoom setting for media capture.

5. The method of any one of claims 3-4, wherein the media capture setting includes a filter setting for media capture.

6. The method of any one of claims 3-5, wherein the media capture setting includes a simulated depth-of-field setting for media capture.

7. The method of any one of claims 3-6, wherein the media capture setting includes a media capture type setting.

8. The method of any one of claims 3-7, wherein the media capture setting includes a focus subject selection.

9. The method of any one of claims 1-8, wherein performing the first operation includes selecting, based on one or more characteristics of the movement of the first type, a first settings value from an ordered sequence of settings values.

10. The method of claim 9, wherein selecting the first settings value from the ordered sequence of settings values includes simulating a transfer of momentum from the movement of the first type to a model of the ordered sequence of settings values.

11. The method of any one of claims 9-10, wherein: the ordered sequence of settings values includes a subset of one or more preset values, and selecting, based on the one or more characteristics of the movement of the first type, the first settings value from the ordered sequence of settings values includes: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a set of one or more drag criteria, selecting the first settings value from the ordered sequence of settings values based on a direction of the movement of the first type and an 1615614854 402Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 amount of the movement of the first type, wherein the set of one or more drag criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a contact that is maintained on the first input device; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a set of one or more flick criteria, selecting the first settings value from the subset of one or more preset values based on a direction of the movement of the first type, wherein the set of one or more flick criteria includes: a first flick criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs ceases to be detected on the first input device; and a second flick criterion that is satisfied when the movement of the first type includes more than a second threshold amount of movement within a threshold period of time before the first flick criterion is satisfied.

12. The method of any one of claims 1-11, wherein performing the first operation includes selecting, based on one or more characteristics of the movement of the first type, a second settings value from a predetermined set of settings values.

13. The method of any one of claims 1-12, wherein the first set of criteria includes a fourth criterion that is satisfied when the second criterion is satisfied after the first criterion is satisfied.

14. The method of any one of claims 1-13, further comprising: after determining that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies the first criterion, detecting a first movement input included in the first set of one or more inputs, wherein the first movement input is detected while an input intensity of the first set of one or more inputs does not exceed the first threshold intensity; and in response to the first movement input, performing the first operation based on the first movement input.

15. The method of any one of claims 1-14, further comprising: after determining that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies the first criterion, detecting a lift-off of the first set of one or more inputs; after detecting the lift-off of the first set of one or more inputs, detecting, via the first input device, a second movement input; and 1615614854 403Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in response to detecting the second movement input: in accordance with a determination that the second movement input was detected within a threshold period of time after detecting the lift-off of the first set of one or more inputs, performing the first operation based on the second movement input.

16. The method of any one of claims 1-15, further comprising: after determining that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies the first criterion, detecting a third movement input; and in response to detecting the third movement input: in accordance with a determination that a lift-off of the first set of one or more inputs was not detected prior to detecting the third movement input, performing the first operation based on the third movement input.

17. The method of any one of claims 1-16, further comprising: after performing the second operation, detecting, via the first input device, a fourth movement input; and in response to detecting the fourth movement input and in accordance with a determination that a lift-off event was not detected in between detecting the second input intensity that exceeds the second threshold intensity and detecting the fourth movement input, performing the first operation based on the fourth movement input.

18. The method of claim 17, further comprising: in response to detecting the fourth movement input and in accordance with a determination that a lift-off event was detected in between detecting the second input intensity that exceeds the second threshold intensity and detecting the fourth movement input, forgoing performing the first operation based on the fourth movement input.

19. The method of any one of claims 1-18, further comprising: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a set of feedback criteria, providing a non-visual feedback output, wherein the set of feedback criteria includes the first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes the first input intensity that exceeds the first threshold intensity. 1615614854 404Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 20. The method of any one of claims 1-19, wherein the first input device includes a first hardware button.

21. The method of any one of claims 1-20, wherein a first input element is activated based on the second input intensity exceeding a third intensity threshold, and performing the second operation includes: in accordance with a determination that the first input element remains activated for at least a second threshold amount of time, capturing video media; and in accordance with a determination that the first input element remains activated for less than the second threshold amount of time, capturing photo media.

22. The method of any one of claims 1-21, wherein the first set of criteria and the second set of criteria each include a requirement that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs is detected while the computer system is displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface; and further comprising: in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a set of launch criteria, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a respective camera user interface, wherein the set of launch criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when a first input element is activated while the computer system is not displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface.

23. The method of any one of claims 1-22, further comprising: in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a third set of criteria, ceasing displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first set of one or more user interface objects, wherein the third set of criteria includes: the first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes the first input intensity that exceeds the first threshold intensity; and a criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs is detected while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a user interface that includes the first set of one or more user interface objects. 1615614854 405Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 24. The method of any one of claims 1-23, further comprising: in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a fourth set of criteria, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second set of one or more user interface objects in a respective user interface, wherein the fourth set of criteria includes: the first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes the first input intensity that exceeds the first threshold intensity; and a criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs is detected while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the respective user interface.

25. The method of any one of claims 1-24, further comprising: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a user interface object corresponding to the first operation, detecting a first tap input directed to the first input device; and: in response to detecting the first tap input, performing the first operation based on the first tap input, wherein performing the first operation based on the first tap input includes: in accordance with a determination that the first tap input is directed to a first region of the first input device, changing a current settings value from an initial settings value to a first updated settings value selected from a predetermined set of settings values; and in accordance with a determination that the first tap input is directed to a second region of the first input device that is different from the first region of the first input device, changing the current settings value from the initial settings value to a second updated settings value selected from the predetermined set of settings values, wherein the first updated settings value is different from the second updated settings value and a direction of change from the initial settings value to the first updated settings value is different from a direction of change from the initial settings value to the second updated settings value.

26. The method of any one of claims 1-25, further comprising: in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an indication of one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs. 1615614854 406Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 27. The method of claim 26, wherein displaying the indication of one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs includes: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs includes a contact at a first location of the first input device, displaying the indication with a first appearance; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs includes a contact at a second location, different from the first location, of the first input device, displaying the indication with a second appearance different from the first appearance.

28. The method of any one of claims 26-27, wherein displaying the indication of one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs includes: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs includes an input of a first input intensity, displaying the indication with a third appearance; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs includes an input of a second input intensity different from the first input intensity, displaying the indication with a fourth appearance different from the third appearance.

29. The method of any one of claims 26-28, further comprising: while displaying the indication of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs, detecting a change to at least one of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs; and in response to detecting the change to at least one of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs, changing an appearance of the indication of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs based on the change to the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs.

30. The method of any one of claims 26-29, further comprising: while displaying the indication of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs, detecting that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a fifth set of criteria, wherein the fifth set of criteria includes the first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes the first input intensity that exceeds the first threshold intensity; and in response to detecting that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies the fifth set of criteria, displaying the indication of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or 1615614854 407Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 more inputs displaying a respective user interface object corresponding to the first operation in place of the indication of the one or more characteristics of the first set of one or more inputs.

31. The method of any one of claims 1-30, further comprising: in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies an sixth set of criteria, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a user interface object corresponding to the first operation, wherein the sixth set of criteria includes the first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes the first input intensity that exceeds the first threshold intensity; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a seventh set of criteria, performing the first operation, wherein: performing the first operation includes adjusting the user interface object; and the seventh set of criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a respective type of input detected while displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation.

32. The method of claim 31, further comprising: while the user interface object corresponding to the first operation is not displayed, detecting a respective input; and in response to detecting the respective input: in accordance with a determination that the respective input includes more than a second threshold amount of movement of the first type, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the user interface object corresponding to the first operation.

33. The method of any one of claims 31-32, further comprising: while displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation, detecting a lift-off event; and in response to detecting the lift-off event and in accordance with a determination that an input that satisfies an eighth set of criteria is not detected, via the first input device, within a threshold period of time after detecting the lift-off event, ceasing displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation. 1615614854 408Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 34. The method of any one of claims 31-33, wherein displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation includes: in accordance with a determination that an orientation of the computer system is in a first state, displaying the user interface object at a first location within a respective user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the orientation of the computer system is in second state different from the first state, displaying the user interface object at a second location, different from the first location, within the respective user interface.

35. The method of any one of claims 31-34, wherein displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation includes: in accordance with a determination that an orientation of the computer system is in a first state, displaying one or more elements of the user interface object in a first display configuration; and in accordance with a determination that the orientation of the computer system is in a second state different from the first state, displaying the or more elements of the user interface object in a second display configuration, different from the first display configuration.

36. The method of any one of claims 31-35, further comprising: while displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation, detecting a third set of one or more inputs including an input directed to a display location of the user interface object; and in response to detecting the third set of one or more inputs, performing the first operation based on the input directed to the display location of the user interface object.

37. The method of any one of claims 31-36, wherein displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation includes: displaying one or more graphical elements of a plurality of graphical elements within a first display region, wherein displaying the one or more graphical elements of the plurality of graphical elements within the first display region includes: distorting an appearance of the one or more graphical elements at a first portion of the first display region corresponding to a first edge of the first display region; and 1615614854 409Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 distorting an appearance of the one or more graphical elements at a second portion of the first display region, different from the first portion of the display region, corresponding to a second edge of the first display region different from the first edge of the display region.

38. The method of any one of claims 1-37, further comprising: while displaying a user interface object corresponding to the first operation, detecting a second set of one or more inputs; and in response to detecting the second set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the second set of one or more inputs corresponds to a request to dismiss the user interface object corresponding to the first operation, ceasing displaying the user interface object corresponding to the first operation.

39. The method of any one of claims 1-38, wherein: the first set of one or more inputs includes a first movement input, wherein the first movement input is more than the threshold amount of movement of the first type and the first movement input moves in a first direction; and performing the first operation includes: in accordance with a determination that the first movement input is detected while an orientation of the computer system is in a first state, changing a current settings value from an initial settings value to a first updated settings value; and in accordance with a determination that the first movement input is detected while the orientation of the computer system is in a second state different from the first state, changing the current settings value from the initial settings value to a second updated settings value different from the second updated settings value, wherein a direction of change from the initial settings value to the first updated settings value is different from a direction of change from the initial settings value to the second updated settings value.

40. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a first input device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 1- 1615614854 410Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 41. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and a first input device, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 1-39.

42. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and a first input device, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 1-39.

43. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a first input device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 1-39.

44. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a first input device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the first input device, a first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a first set of criteria, performing a first operation, wherein the first set of criteria includes: a first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a first input intensity that exceeds a first threshold intensity; and a second criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes more than a threshold amount of movement of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device satisfies a second set of criteria different from the first set of criteria, performing a second operation different from the first operation, wherein the second set of criteria includes a third criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs 1615614854 411Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 includes a second input intensity that exceeds a second threshold intensity that is higher than the first threshold intensity.

45. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and a first input device, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the first input device, a first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a first set of criteria, performing a first operation, wherein the first set of criteria includes: a first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a first input intensity that exceeds a first threshold intensity; and a second criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes more than a threshold amount of movement of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device satisfies a second set of criteria different from the first set of criteria, performing a second operation different from the first operation, wherein the second set of criteria includes a third criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a second input intensity that exceeds a second threshold intensity that is higher than the first threshold intensity.

46. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and a first input device, comprising: means for detecting, via the first input device, a first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device; and means for, in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a first set of criteria, performing a first operation, wherein the first set of criteria includes: 1615614854 412Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 a first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a first input intensity that exceeds a first threshold intensity; and a second criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes more than a threshold amount of movement of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device satisfies a second set of criteria different from the first set of criteria, performing a second operation different from the first operation, wherein the second set of criteria includes a third criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a second input intensity that exceeds a second threshold intensity that is higher than the first threshold intensity.

47. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a first input device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the first input device, a first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a first set of criteria, performing a first operation, wherein the first set of criteria includes: a first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a first input intensity that exceeds a first threshold intensity; and a second criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes more than a threshold amount of movement of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device satisfies a second set of criteria different from the first set of criteria, performing a second operation different from the first operation, wherein the second set of criteria includes a third criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a second input intensity that exceeds a second threshold intensity that is higher than the first threshold intensity. 1615614854 413Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 48. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, one or more cameras, and a first input device: detecting, via the first input device, a first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device; in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a first set of criteria, capturing, via the one or more cameras, first photo media, wherein the first set of criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes press input of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a second set of criteria, capturing, via the one or more cameras, first video media, wherein the second set of criteria includes a second criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a press input of a second type different from the first type;. while capturing the first video media, detecting an end of the first set of one or more inputs; and in response to detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs included a movement of a first type, continuing to capture the first video media after detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs.

49. The method of claim 48, wherein the press input of the first type includes: a first input portion, detected at a first time, that has an input intensity that exceeds a first threshold intensity; and a second input portion, detected at a second time after the first time, that includes an input intensity that is below the first intensity threshold and is detected while an input element maintains contact with the first input device.

50. The method of any one of claims 48-49, wherein the press input of the first type includes a respective press input with a respective input intensity that falls below a first threshold intensity within a first threshold period of time after the respective press input is initially detected. 1615614854 414Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 51. The method of any one of claims 48-50, wherein the press input of the first type includes a respective press input that lifts off of the first input device within a second threshold period of time after initially detecting the respective press input.

52. The method of any one of claims 48-51, wherein the press input of the second type includes a respective press input with a respective input intensity that does not fall below a second threshold intensity within a third threshold period of time after initially detecting the respective press input.

53. The method of any one of claims 48-52, wherein: the press input of the second type includes a respective press input with a respective input intensity that does not fall below a third threshold intensity within a fourth threshold period of time after initially detecting the respective press input; and the movement of the first type includes a respective movement detected more than the fourth threshold period of time after initially detecting the respective press input.

54. The method of any one of claims 48-53, wherein: the first input device includes a first hardware element; and the movement of the first type includes a movement in a first direction across a first surface of the first hardware element.

55. The method of any one of claims 48-54, wherein: the first input device includes a touch-sensitive surface of the one or more display generation components; and the movement of the first type includes a movement in a second direction across the touch-sensitive surface of the one or more display generation components.

56. The method of any one of claims 48-55, further comprising: while capturing the first video media and prior to detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a graphical indicator prompting the movement of the first type. 1615614854 415Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 57. The method of claim 56, wherein: the first input device includes a second hardware element located outside of a display region of the one or more display generation components; and the graphical indicator prompting the movement of the first type is displayed proximate to the second hardware element within the display region of the one or more display generation components.

58. The method of any one of claims 56-57, wherein the graphical indicator prompting the movement of the first type includes a first indication of a respective direction of the movement of the first type.

59. The method of any one of claims 56-58, wherein: movement of at least a first threshold magnitude is required to continuing to capture the first video media after detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs, and the method further comprises, while displaying the graphical indicator prompting the movement of the first type: detecting a first movement input of the first set of one or more inputs, wherein the first movement input is a movement of a second magnitude that is less than the first threshold magnitude; and in response to detecting the first movement input of the first set of one or more inputs, updating the graphical indicator prompting the movement of the first type to indicate how much additional movement is needed to get to the first threshold magnitude of movement.

60. The method of any one of claims 56-59, further comprising: while displaying the graphical indicator prompting the movement of the first type, detecting a second movement input of the first set of one or more inputs; and in response to detecting the second movement input and in accordance with a determination that the second movement input includes movement of at least the first threshold magnitude, ceasing displaying the graphical indicator.

61. The method of any one of claims 48-60, wherein the press input of the second type includes a press input maintained for at least a first threshold period of time, and further comprising: 1615614854 416Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 at a first time prior to capturing the first video media, detecting a first press input of the first set of one or more inputs; and while detecting the first press input and less than the first threshold period of time after the first time, changing an appearance of a media capture user interface from a first appearance state to a second appearance state.

62. The method of claim 61, further comprising: while displaying the media capture user interface in the second appearance state, detecting an end of the first press input; and in response to detecting the end of the first press input, changing the appearance of the media capture user interface from the second appearance state to the first appearance state.

63. The method of any one of claims 61-62, wherein changing the appearance of the media capture user interface from the first appearance state to the second appearance state includes displaying a capture mode selection user interface element of the media capture user interface transitioning from a photo capture mode to a video capture mode.

64. The method of any one of claims 61-63, wherein changing the appearance of the media capture user interface from the first appearance state to the second appearance state includes displaying a media capture user interface element of the media capture user interface changing from a photo capture user interface element to a video capture user interface element.

65. The method of any one of claims 61-64, wherein changing the appearance of the media capture user interface from the first appearance state to the second appearance state includes displaying an aspect ratio of a media capture preview of the media capture user interface changing from a first aspect ratio to a second aspect ratio.

66. The method of any one of claims 48-65, wherein: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs is detected while a first photo media capture mode is selected: capturing the first photo media includes capturing the first photo media in the first photo media capture mode; and 1615614854 417Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 capturing the first video media includes capturing the first video media in a first video media capture mode; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs is detected while a second photo media capture mode, different from the first photo media capture mode, is selected: capturing the first photo media includes capturing the first photo media in the second photo media capture mode; and capturing the first video media includes capturing the first video media in a second video media capture mode, different from the first video media capture mode.

67. The method of claim 66, wherein: capturing the first photo media in the first photo media capture mode includes capturing the first photo media with a set of one or more standard photo settings; and capturing the first video media in the first video media capture mode includes capturing the first video media with a set of one or more standard video settings.

68. The method of any one of claims 66-67, wherein: capturing the first photo media in the second photo media capture mode includes capturing the first photo media with a set of one or more portrait photo settings, wherein the set of one or more portrait photo settings includes applying simulated depth-of-field effects to the first photo media; and capturing the first video media in the second video media capture mode includes capturing the first video media with a set of one or more cinematic video settings, wherein the set of one or more portrait video settings includes applying the simulated depth-of-field effects to the first video media.

69. The method of any one of claims 48-68, further comprising: detecting, via the first input device, a second set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the second set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the second set of one or more inputs satisfies a set of launch criteria, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a respective camera user interface, wherein the set of launch criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when a first 1615614854 418Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 input element is activated while the computer system is not displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface.

70. The method of any one of claims 48-69, further comprising: while capturing the first video media: detecting, via the first input device, a first movement input of the first set of one or more inputs, wherein the first movement input is a movement of the first type; and after detecting the first movement input of the first set of one or more inputs, detecting, via the first input device, a first press input; and in response to detecting the first press input, capturing, via the one or more cameras, second photo media.

71. The method of any one of claims 48-70, further comprising: while capturing the first video media: detecting, via the first input device, a second movement input of the first set of one or more inputs, wherein the second movement input is a movement of the first type; and after detecting the second movement input of the first set of one or more inputs, detecting, via the first input device, a second press input; and in response to detecting the second press input, ceasing capturing the first video media.

72. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, one or more cameras, and a first input device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 48-71.

73. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, one or more cameras, and a first input device, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 48-71. 1615614854 419Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 74. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, one or more cameras, and a first input device, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 48-71.

75. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, one or more cameras, and a first input device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 48- 71.

76. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, one or more cameras, and a first input device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the first input device, a first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device; in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a first set of criteria, capturing, via the one or more cameras, first photo media, wherein the first set of criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes press input of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a second set of criteria, capturing, via the one or more cameras, first video media, wherein the second set of criteria includes a second criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a press input of a second type different from the first type; while capturing the first video media, detecting an end of the first set of one or more inputs; and in response to detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs included a movement of a first type, continuing to capture the first video media after detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs. 1615614854 420Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 77. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, one or more cameras, and a first input device, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the first input device, a first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device; in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a first set of criteria, capturing, via the one or more cameras, first photo media, wherein the first set of criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes press input of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a second set of criteria, capturing, via the one or more cameras, first video media, wherein the second set of criteria includes a second criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a press input of a second type different from the first type; while capturing the first video media, detecting an end of the first set of one or more inputs; and in response to detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs included a movement of a first type, continuing to capture the first video media after detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs.

78. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, one or more cameras, and a first input device, comprising: means for detecting, via the first input device, a first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device; means for, in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a first set of criteria, capturing, via the one or more cameras, first photo media, wherein the first set of criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes press input of a first type; and 1615614854 421Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a second set of criteria, capturing, via the one or more cameras, first video media, wherein the second set of criteria includes a second criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a press input of a second type different from the first type; means for, while capturing the first video media, detecting an end of the first set of one or more inputs; and means for, in response to detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs included a movement of a first type, continuing to capture the first video media after detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs.

79. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, one or more cameras, and a first input device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the first input device, a first set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device; in response to detecting the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a first set of criteria, capturing, via the one or more cameras, first photo media, wherein the first set of criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes press input of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs satisfies a second set of criteria, capturing, via the one or more cameras, first video media, wherein the second set of criteria includes a second criterion that is satisfied when the first set of one or more inputs includes a press input of a second type different from the first type; while capturing the first video media, detecting an end of the first set of one or more inputs; and in response to detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the first set of one or more inputs included a movement of a first type, continuing to capture the first video media after detecting the end of the first set of one or more inputs. 1615614854 422Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 80. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a first input device: detecting a first input including a movement that starts at a first location corresponding to the first input device and ends at a second location that is different from the first location; in response to detecting the first input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an option user interface, including a plurality of selectable user interface objects corresponding to a respective plurality of operations that can be associated with the first input device; while displaying the options user interface, detecting a second input selecting a respective selectable user interface object of the plurality of selectable user interface objects; after detecting the second input, detecting, via the first input device, a third input directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the third input directed to the first input device: in accordance with a determination that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, performing a first operation of the respective plurality of operations, wherein the first set of one or more criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective selectable user interface object that was selected by the second input corresponds to the first operation; and in accordance with a determination that a second set of one or more criteria is satisfied, performing a second operation of the respective plurality of operations that is different from the first operation of the respective plurality of operations, wherein the second set of one or more criteria includes a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective selectable user interface object that was selected by the second input corresponds to the second operation.

81. The method of claim 80, further comprising: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first user interface, wherein the first user interface is displayed while detecting the first input and while displaying the option user interface; and while displaying the option user interface, reducing a visual prominence of the first user interface relative to a visual prominence of the option user interface. 1615614854 423Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 82. The method of claim 81, wherein reducing the visual prominence of the first user interface relative to the visual prominence of the option user interface includes ceasing displaying a first portion of the first user interface in a first display region, wherein the option user interface is displayed in the first display region.

83. The method of any one of claims 81-82, wherein reducing the visual prominence of the first user interface relative to the visual prominence of the option user interface includes fading a second portion of the first user interface.

84. The method of any one of claims 80-83, wherein the first set of one or more criteria includes a press criterion that is satisfied when the third input includes a first press input directed to the first input device.

85. The method of any one of claims 80-84, wherein the first set of one or more criteria includes a movement criterion that is satisfied when the third input includes a movement input directed to the first input device.

86. The method of claim 85, further comprising: detecting a fourth input directed to the first input device, wherein the fourth input does not satisfy the movement criterion; and in response to detecting the fourth input directed to the first input device, performing a respective operation.

87. The method of claim 86, wherein the fourth input includes a second press input directed to the first input device or a first tap gesture directed to the first input device.

88. The method of any one of claims 86-87, wherein performing the respective operation includes performing a media capture operation.

89. The method of any one of claims 80-88, wherein the first operation of the respective plurality of operations includes adjusting a first setting, and further comprising: 1615614854 424Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media capture user interface that includes a representation of a field-of-view of one or more cameras, wherein the media capture user interface is displayed while detecting the third input; and in response to detecting the third input directed to the first input device: while performing the first operation of the respective plurality of operations, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an indicator of a current value of the first setting, wherein the indicator of the current value of the first setting is displayed overlaying a portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

90. The method of claim 89, further comprising: while displaying the indicator of the current value of the first setting: detecting a change in an appearance of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras within a respective display region that includes the portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras; and in response to detecting the change in the appearance of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras within the respective display region that includes the portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, changing an appearance of the indicator of the current value of the first setting based on the change in the appearance of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras within the respective display region that includes the portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

91. The method of any one of claims 80-90, wherein the first set of one or more criteria includes a third criterion that is satisfied when the third input is detected while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first user interface of a first application or a second user interface of a second application different from the first application.

92. The method of claim 91, wherein performing the first operation includes: changing a first property of a first set of data, wherein the first set of data is provided as an input to the first user interface of the first application and the first set of data is provided as an input to the second user interface of the second application. 1615614854 425Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 93. The method of any one of claims 80-92, wherein performing the first operation includes performing a first media capture operation.

94. The method of claim 93, wherein performing the first media capture operation includes adjusting a zoom setting for media capture.

95. The method of any one of claims 93-94, wherein performing the first media capture operation includes adjusting a simulated depth-of-field setting for media capture.

96. The method of any one of claims 93-95, wherein performing the first media capture operation includes adjusting an exposure setting for media capture.

97. The method of any one of claims 93-96, wherein performing the first media capture operation includes adjusting a filter setting for media capture.

98. The method of any one of claims 80-97, further comprising: detecting an additional set of one or more inputs directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the additional set of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the additional set of one or more inputs satisfies a set of launch criteria, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a respective camera user interface, wherein the set of launch criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when a first input element is activated while the computer system is not displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface.

99. The method of any one of claims 80-98, further comprising: detecting a fourth input directed to the first input device, wherein the fourth input includes a fourth press input directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the fourth input directed to the first input device: in accordance with a determination that the fourth input directed to the first input device is detected while displaying a user interface of a first camera application, performing a media capture operation using the first camera application; and in accordance with a determination that the fourth input directed to the first input device is detected while displaying a user interface of a second camera application, performing the media capture operation using the second camera application. 1615614854 426Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 100. The method of claim 99, wherein displaying the option user interface including the plurality of selectable user interface objects corresponding to the respective plurality of operations that can be associated with the first input device includes: in accordance with a determination that the first input is detected while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the user interface of the first camera application, displaying a first selectable user interface object corresponding to a first operation that can be associated with the first input device; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is detected while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the user interface of the second camera application, foregoing displaying the first selectable user interface object corresponding to the first operation that can be associated with the first input device.

101. The method of any one of claims 80-100, further comprising: in response to detecting the third input directed to the first input device: in accordance with a determination that a respective set of one or more criteria is satisfied, performing a respective operation different from the first operation and different from the second operation, wherein: the respective set of one or more criteria includes a respective criterion that is satisfied when the third input directed to the first input device is a press input of a respective type.

102. The method of any one of claims 80-101, further comprising: detecting a press input directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the press input: in accordance with a determination that a user interface for a camera application was not displayed when the press input was detected, displaying a user interface for a default camera application; and in accordance with a determination that a user interface for a first camera application was displayed when the press input was detected, performing an operation corresponding to the first camera application.

103. The method of claim 102, wherein displaying the user interface for the default camera application includes: 1615614854 427Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in accordance with a determination that a user has selected the first camera application as the default camera application, displaying the user interface for the first camera application; and in accordance with a determination that the user has selected a second camera application, different from the first camera application as the default camera application, displaying the user interface for the second camera application.

104. The method of any one of claims 80-103, further comprising: detecting, via the first input device, a respective input at the first input device; and in response to detecting the respective input at the first input device: in accordance with a determination that the respective input at the first input device satisfies a respective set of one or more criteria that includes a requirement that the respective input be maintained for more than a threshold amount of time in order for the respective set of one or more criteria to be satisfied, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a prompt to provide additional input to display one or more controls for adjusting a function of the first input device.

105. The method of any one of claims 80-104, further comprising: while displaying the option user interface, detecting a first movement input that includes movement toward a location of the first input device; and in response to detecting the first movement input, ceasing displaying at least a portion of the option user interface.

106. The method of claim 105, further comprising: in response to detecting the first movement input, displaying an operation user interface for a respective operation of the plurality of operations that can be associated with the first input device; while displaying the operation user interface, detecting a second movement input that includes movement toward a location of the first input device; and in response to detecting the second movement input, ceasing displaying at least a portion of the operation user interface.

107. The method of any one of claims 80-106, wherein performing the first operation of the respective plurality of operations includes: 1615614854 428Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in accordance with a determination that the third input directed to the first input device satisfies light press criteria, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a control user interface for the first operation, wherein the light press criteria include a criterion that is satisfied when the third input includes a press that reaches a first intensity threshold without reaching a second intensity threshold that is higher than the first intensity threshold.

108. The method of any one of claims 80-107, wherein: the option user interface is not displayed when the third input is detected; and the method includes, in response to detecting the third input directed to the first input device: in accordance with a determination that the third input directed to the first input device satisfies multiple-press criteria, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the option user interface, wherein the multiple-press criteria include a requirement that a plurality of press inputs were detected at the first input device within a threshold amount of time in order for the multiple press criteria to be satisfied.

109. The method of any one of claims 80-108, further comprising: detecting a fifth input directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the fifth input directed to the first input device: in accordance with a determination that the fifth input directed to the first input device satisfies swipe criteria including a swipe criterion that is satisfied when the fifth input includes more than a threshold amount of movement along the first input device, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a control for adjusting a function associated with the first input device.

110. The method of any one of claims 80-109, wherein the second input selecting the respective selectable user interface object of the plurality of selectable user interface objects includes an input directed to a location of the respective selectable user interface object on a touch-sensitive surface of the one or more display generation components. 1615614854 429Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 111. The method of any one of claims 80-110, wherein: the second input selecting the respective selectable user interface object of the plurality of selectable user interface objects includes an input directed to the first input device; the input directed to the first input device satisfies press criteria.

112. The method of any one of claims 80-111, further comprising: in response to detecting, via the first input device, a respective input, comparing a detected intensity of the respective input to a set of intensity thresholds to determine whether the respective input meets one or more criteria for detecting a respective type of gesture, wherein the set of intensity thresholds includes one or more intensity thresholds selected based on input from a user of the computer system.

113. The method of claim 112, further comprising: in response to detecting, via the first input device, the respective input: in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective input satisfies a first set of intensity criteria, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an input indicator with first appearance; and in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective input does not satisfy the first set of intensity criteria, forgoing displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the input indicator with first appearance.

114. The method of any one of claims 80-113, wherein displaying the option user interface includes: displaying one or more selectable user interface objects of the plurality of selectable user interface objects within a first display region, wherein displaying the one or more selectable user interface objects of the plurality of selectable user interface objects within a first display region includes: distorting an appearance of the one or more selectable user interface objects at a first portion of the first display region corresponding to a first edge of the first display region; and distorting an appearance of the one or more selectable user interface objects at a second portion of the first display region, different from the first portion of the display 1615614854 430Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 region, corresponding to a second edge of the first display region different from the first edge of the display region.

115. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a first input device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 80- 114.

116. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and a first input device, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 80-114.

117. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and a first input device, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 80-114.

118. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a first input device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 80-114.

119. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a first input device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting a first input including a movement that starts at a first location corresponding to the first input device and ends at a second location that is different from the first location; in response to detecting the first input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an option user interface, including a plurality of selectable user 1615614854 431Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 interface objects corresponding to a respective plurality of operations that can be associated with the first input device; while displaying the options user interface, detecting a second input selecting a respective selectable user interface object of the plurality of selectable user interface objects; after detecting the second input, detecting, via the first input device, a third input directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the third input directed to the first input device: in accordance with a determination that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, performing a first operation of the respective plurality of operations, wherein the first set of one or more criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective selectable user interface object that was selected by the second input corresponds to the first operation; and in accordance with a determination that a second set of one or more criteria is satisfied, performing a second operation of the respective plurality of operations that is different from the first operation of the respective plurality of operations, wherein the second set of one or more criteria includes a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective selectable user interface object that was selected by the second input corresponds to the second operation.

120. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and a first input device, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting a first input including a movement that starts at a first location corresponding to the first input device and ends at a second location that is different from the first location; in response to detecting the first input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an option user interface, including a plurality of selectable user interface objects corresponding to a respective plurality of operations that can be associated with the first input device; while displaying the options user interface, detecting a second input selecting a respective selectable user interface object of the plurality of selectable user interface objects; 1615614854 432Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 after detecting the second input, detecting, via the first input device, a third input directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the third input directed to the first input device: in accordance with a determination that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, performing a first operation of the respective plurality of operations, wherein the first set of one or more criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective selectable user interface object that was selected by the second input corresponds to the first operation; and in accordance with a determination that a second set of one or more criteria is satisfied, performing a second operation of the respective plurality of operations that is different from the first operation of the respective plurality of operations, wherein the second set of one or more criteria includes a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective selectable user interface object that was selected by the second input corresponds to the second operation.

121. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and a first input device, comprising: means for detecting a first input including a movement that starts at a first location corresponding to the first input device and ends at a second location that is different from the first location; means for, in response to detecting the first input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an option user interface, including a plurality of selectable user interface objects corresponding to a respective plurality of operations that can be associated with the first input device; means for, while displaying the options user interface, detecting a second input selecting a respective selectable user interface object of the plurality of selectable user interface objects; means for, after detecting the second input, detecting, via the first input device, a third input directed to the first input device; and means for, in response to detecting the third input directed to the first input device: in accordance with a determination that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, performing a first operation of the respective plurality of operations, wherein the first set of one or more criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective 1615614854 433Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 selectable user interface object that was selected by the second input corresponds to the first operation; and in accordance with a determination that a second set of one or more criteria is satisfied, performing a second operation of the respective plurality of operations that is different from the first operation of the respective plurality of operations, wherein the second set of one or more criteria includes a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective selectable user interface object that was selected by the second input corresponds to the second operation.

122. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a first input device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting a first input including a movement that starts at a first location corresponding to the first input device and ends at a second location that is different from the first location; in response to detecting the first input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an option user interface, including a plurality of selectable user interface objects corresponding to a respective plurality of operations that can be associated with the first input device; while displaying the options user interface, detecting a second input selecting a respective selectable user interface object of the plurality of selectable user interface objects; after detecting the second input, detecting, via the first input device, a third input directed to the first input device; and in response to detecting the third input directed to the first input device: in accordance with a determination that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, performing a first operation of the respective plurality of operations, wherein the first set of one or more criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective selectable user interface object that was selected by the second input corresponds to the first operation; and in accordance with a determination that a second set of one or more criteria is satisfied, performing a second operation of the respective plurality of operations that is different from the first operation of the respective plurality of operations, wherein the second set of one or more criteria includes a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective 1615614854 434Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 selectable user interface object that was selected by the second input corresponds to the second operation.

123. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components: receiving a request to play a video media item; and in response to receiving the request to play the video media item, playing the video media item, including, while playing the video media item, decreasing a playback speed of a respective portion of the video media item, wherein the respective portion of the video media item is automatically selected based on content of the video media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first portion of the video media item satisfies a set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the first portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item; and in accordance with a determination that a second portion of the video media item, different from the first portion of the video media item, satisfies the set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the second portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item.

124. The method of claim 123, wherein playing the video media item includes: while playing the video media item, ramping a playback speed of one or more transition portions of the video media item between a first playback speed and a second playback speed that is lower than the first playback speed, wherein: the one or more transition portions are adjacent to a segment of the respective portion of the video media item; and decreasing the playback speed of the respective portion of the video media item includes playing the segment of the respective portion of the video media item at the second playback speed.

125. The method of claim 124, wherein the one or more transition portions of the video media item includes a first transition portion of the video media item, wherein the first 1615614854 435Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 transition portion of the video media item is before the segment of the respective portion of the video media item.

126. The method of any one of claims 124-125, wherein the one or more transition portions of the video media item includes a second transition portion of the video media item, wherein the second transition portion of the video media item is after the segment of the respective portion of the video media item.

127. The method of any one of claims 123-126, further comprising: while playing the video media item, decreasing a playback speed of a second respective portion of the video media item, different from the respective portion of the video media item, wherein the second respective portion of the video media item is automatically selected based on the content of the video media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a fourth portion of the video media item satisfies the set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the fourth portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item; and in accordance with a determination that a fifth portion of the video media item satisfies the set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the fifth portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item.

128. The method of any one of claims 123-127, wherein playing the video media item includes: while playing the video media item, increasing the playback speed of a third respective portion of the video media item different from the respective portion of the video media item, wherein the third respective portion of the video media item is automatically selected based on the content of the video media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a sixth portion of the video media item does not satisfy the set of one or more video characteristic criteria and in accordance with a determination that the sixth portion of the video media item satisfies a second set of one or more video characteristic criteria, speeding up the sixth portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item. 1615614854 436Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 129. The method of any one of claims 123-128, wherein: the respective portion of the video media item includes a plurality of frames; and decreasing the playback speed of the respective portion of the video media item includes inserting a plurality of interpolated fames into the plurality of frames for playback, wherein the plurality of interpolated frames includes: a first interpolated frame generated based on a first frame of the plurality of frames and a second frame of the plurality of frames, wherein the first interpolated frame is inserted between the first frame and the second frame for playback; and a second interpolated frame generated based on the second frame of the plurality of frames and a third frame of the plurality of frames, wherein the second interpolated frame is inserted between the second frame and the third frame for playback.

130. The method of any one of claims 123-129, further comprising: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of the video media item, receiving a request to edit a playback speed profile of the video media item; and in response to receiving the request to edit the playback speed profile of the video media item, displaying a set of one or more selectable user interface objects, wherein the set of one or more controls includes: a first selectable user interface object that, when selected, selects a seventh portion of the video media item to be slowed down, wherein slowing down the seventh portion of the video media item includes decreasing a playback speed of the seventh portion of the video media item during playback of the video media item; and a second selectable user interface objects that, when selected, selects a first playback speed for an eighth portion of the video media item, wherein selecting the first playback speed for the eight portion of the video media item causes the eighth portion of the video media item to be played at the first playback speed during playback.

131. The method of claim 130, further comprising: while displaying the set of one or more selectable user interface objects, displaying an indication of the respective portion of the video media item. 1615614854 437Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 132. The method of any one of claims 123-131, further comprising: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of the video media item: in accordance with a determination that at least one portion of the video media item satisfies the set of one or more video characteristic criteria, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a graphical indication that the at least one portion of the video media item has been automatically selected for playback with reduced speed.

133. The method of claim 132, wherein the graphical indication is displayed in a media editing user interface.

134. The method of any one of claims 132-133, wherein the graphical indication includes a selectable user interface object that, when selected, initiates a process for changing a playback speed of the at least one portion of the video media item during playback.

135. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 123-134.

136. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 123-134.

137. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 123-134.

138. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one 1615614854 438Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 or more display generation components, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 123-134.

139. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a request to play a video media item; and in response to receiving the request to play the video media item, playing the video media item, including, while playing the video media item, decreasing a playback speed of a respective portion of the video media item, wherein the respective portion of the video media item is automatically selected based on content of the video media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first portion of the video media item satisfies a set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the first portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item; and in accordance with a determination that a second portion of the video media item, different from the first portion of the video media item, satisfies the set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the second portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item.

140. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a request to play a video media item; and in response to receiving the request to play the video media item, playing the video media item, including, while playing the video media item, decreasing a playback speed of a respective portion of the video media item, wherein the respective portion of the video media item is automatically selected based on content of the video media item, including: 1615614854 439Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in accordance with a determination that a first portion of the video media item satisfies a set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the first portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item; and in accordance with a determination that a second portion of the video media item, different from the first portion of the video media item, satisfies the set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the second portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item.

141. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, comprising: means for receiving a request to play a video media item; and means for, in response to receiving the request to play the video media item, playing the video media item, including, while playing the video media item, decreasing a playback speed of a respective portion of the video media item, wherein the respective portion of the video media item is automatically selected based on content of the video media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first portion of the video media item satisfies a set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the first portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item; and in accordance with a determination that a second portion of the video media item, different from the first portion of the video media item, satisfies the set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the second portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item.

142. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a request to play a video media item; and in response to receiving the request to play the video media item, playing the video media item, including, while playing the video media item, decreasing a playback speed of a 1615614854 440Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 respective portion of the video media item, wherein the respective portion of the video media item is automatically selected based on content of the video media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first portion of the video media item satisfies a set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the first portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item; and in accordance with a determination that a second portion of the video media item, different from the first portion of the video media item, satisfies the set of one or more video characteristic criteria, slowing down the second portion of the video media item relative to at least one other portion of the video media item while playing the video media item.

143. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components: detecting an input directed to a control element of a user interface, wherein the input includes a detected movement component; in response to detecting the input directed to the control element, causing a first adjustment to a value of a parameter associated with the control element, wherein the first adjustment is based on the detected movement component; detecting an end of the input; and after detecting the end of the input, causing a second adjustment to the value of the parameter associated with the control element, wherein the second adjustment is based on the detected movement component.

144. The method of claim 143, wherein a magnitude of the first adjustment to the value of the parameter associated with the control element is based on a magnitude of the detected movement component.

145. The method of any one of claims 143-144, wherein a magnitude of the second adjustment to the value of the parameter associated with the control element is based on a magnitude of a first movement component detected within a first threshold period of time of detecting the end of the input. 1615614854 441Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 146. The method of any one of claims 143-145, wherein a direction of the first adjustment to the value of the parameter associated with the control element corresponds to a direction of the detected movement component.

147. The method of any one of claims 143-146, wherein causing the second adjustment to the value of the parameter associated with the control element includes: in accordance with a determination that a direction of a second movement component detected within a second threshold period of time of detecting the end of the input corresponds to a direction from a current parameter value to a first parameter values included in a first set of parameter values, adjusting the value of the parameter from the current parameter value to the first parameter value of the first set of parameter values; and in accordance with a determination that the direction of the second movement component detected within the second threshold period of time of detecting the end of the input does not correspond to the direction from the current parameter value to the first parameter value included in the first set of parameter values, foregoing adjusting the value of the parameter from the current parameter value to the first parameter value of the first set of parameter values.

148. The method of any one of claims 143-147, wherein: causing the first adjustment to the value of the parameter associated with the control element includes: in accordance with a determination that adjusting the value of the parameter by a first magnitude and in a first direction, wherein the first magnitude is based on a magnitude of the detected movement component and the first direction corresponds to a direction of the detected movement component, would adjust the value of the parameter past a respective value of a second set of parameter values while the input is ongoing, adjusting the value of the parameter by the first magnitude and in the first direction past the respective value; and causing the second adjustment to the value of the parameter associated with the control element includes: in accordance with a determination that adjusting the value of the parameter by a second magnitude and in a second direction, wherein the second magnitude is based on a magnitude of a third movement component detected within a third threshold period of time of detecting the end of the input and the second direction corresponds to a direction of the third 1615614854 442Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 movement component, would adjust the value of the parameter past a respective value of a second set of parameter values after the input has ended, adjusting the parameter value to the respective value of the second set of parameter values.

149. The method of claim 148, wherein: the parameter is a camera zoom parameter; and the second set of parameter values includes one or more zoom levels corresponding to higher-quality media capture.

150. The method of claim 149, wherein the one or more zoom levels corresponding to higher-quality media capture correspond to one or more zoom levels of one or more respective fixed focal length lenses of one or more cameras in communication with the computer system.

151. The method of any one of claims 148-150, wherein the second set of parameter values includes a plurality of values of the parameter.

152. The method of any one of claims 143-151, further comprising: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a plurality of graphical elements representing an ordered plurality of values of the parameter, wherein: the ordered plurality of values of the parameter are uniformly spaced values; and a first pair of graphical elements of the plurality of graphical elements representing a first pair of subsequent parameter values of the ordered plurality of values are displayed farther apart than a second pair of graphical elements of the plurality of graphical elements representing a second pair of subsequent parameter values of the ordered plurality of values, wherein the first pair of subsequent parameter values are lower than the second pair of subsequent parameter values.

153. The method of claim 152, further comprising: in response to detecting the input directed to the control element: in accordance with a determination that the value of the parameter is adjusted to a first parameter value of the ordered plurality of values of the parameter: 1615614854 443Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 displaying a visual prominence of a first graphical element of the plurality of graphical elements that represents the first parameter value increasing to a first visual prominence; and after displaying the visual prominence of the first graphical element that represents the first parameter value increasing to the first visual prominence and in accordance with a determination that the value of the parameter is no longer adjusted to the first parameter value, displaying the visual prominence of the first graphical element decreasing to a second visual prominence that is less visually prominent than the first visual prominence; and in accordance with a determination that the value of the parameter is adjusted to a second parameter value of the ordered plurality of values of the parameter: displaying a visual prominence of a second graphical element of the plurality of graphical elements that represents the second parameter value increasing to the first visual prominence; and after displaying the visual prominence of the second graphical element that represents the second parameter value increasing to the first visual prominence and in accordance with a determination that the value of the parameter is no longer adjusted to the second parameter value, displaying the visual prominence of the second graphical element decreasing to the second visual prominence.

154. The method of claim 153, further comprising: adjusting the value of the parameter from a third parameter value of the ordered plurality of values of the parameter to a fourth parameter value of the ordered plurality of values of the parameter, wherein adjusting the value of the parameter from the third parameter value to the fourth parameter value includes displaying a visual prominence of a fourth graphical element of the plurality of graphical elements that represents the fourth parameter value increasing to the first visual prominence; and after adjusting the value of the parameter from the third parameter value to the fourth parameter value, adjusting the value of the parameter from the fourth parameter value to a fifth parameter value of the ordered plurality of values of the parameter, wherein adjusting the value of the parameter from the fourth parameter value to the fifth parameter value includes: 1615614854 444Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 displaying a visual prominence of a fifth graphical element of the plurality of graphical elements that represents the fifth parameter value increasing to the first visual prominence; and displaying a visual prominence of the fourth graphical element of the plurality of graphical elements that represents the fourth parameter value decreasing to the second visual prominence.

155. The method of any one of claims 152-154, wherein displaying a respective visual prominence of a respective graphical element of the plurality of graphical elements decreasing to the second visual prominence includes animating the respective graphical element contracting based on simulated physics.

156. The method of any one of claims 152-155, wherein the plurality of graphical elements representing the ordered plurality of values of the parameter are included in a first user interface element displayed in the user interface, and further comprising: detecting a second input directed to the control element, wherein the second input includes a second detected movement component; and in response to detecting the second input directed to the control element: in accordance with a determination that a third adjustment based on the second detected movement component would adjust the value of the parameter to a parameter value outside of a range of parameter values included in the ordered plurality of values of the parameter, displaying the first user interface element shifting from an initial position to an offset position in a direction of the second detected movement component.

157. The method of claim 156, further comprising: while displaying the first user interface element in the offset position, detecting an end of the second input; and in response to detecting the end of the second input, displaying the first user interface element shifting back to the initial position.

158. The method of any one of claims 143-157, wherein the control element of the user interface includes a hardware control element. 1615614854 445Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 159. The method of any one of claims 143-158, wherein the control element of the user interface includes a selectable user interface element displayed via the one or more display generation components.

160. The method of any one of claims 143-159, wherein the parameter associated with the control element includes one or more of a camera zoom parameter, a camera exposure parameter, and a camera filter intensity parameter.

161. The method of any one of claims 143-160, further comprising: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, user interface object corresponding to the control element, wherein displaying the user interface object corresponding to the control element includes: displaying one or more graphical elements of a plurality of graphical elements representing a respective plurality of values of the parameter; distorting an appearance of the one or more graphical elements at a first portion of the first display region corresponding to a first edge of the first display region; and distorting an appearance of the one or more graphical elements at a second portion of the first display region, different from the first portion of the display region, corresponding to a second edge of the first display region different from the first edge of the display region.

162. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 143-161.

163. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 143-161. 1615614854 446Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 164. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 143-161.

165. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 143-161.

166. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an input directed to a control element of a user interface, wherein the input includes a detected movement component; in response to detecting the input directed to the control element, causing a first adjustment to a value of a parameter associated with the control element, wherein the first adjustment is based on the detected movement component; detecting an end of the input; and after detecting the end of the input, causing a second adjustment to the value of the parameter associated with the control element, wherein the second adjustment is based on the detected movement component.

167. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an input directed to a control element of a user interface, wherein the input includes a detected movement component; in response to detecting the input directed to the control element, causing a first adjustment to a value of a parameter associated with the control element, wherein the first adjustment is based on the detected movement component; detecting an end of the input; and 1615614854 447Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 after detecting the end of the input, causing a second adjustment to the value of the parameter associated with the control element, wherein the second adjustment is based on the detected movement component.

168. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, comprising: means for detecting an input directed to a control element of a user interface, wherein the input includes a detected movement component; means for, in response to detecting the input directed to the control element, causing a first adjustment to a value of a parameter associated with the control element, wherein the first adjustment is based on the detected movement component; means for detecting an end of the input; and means for, after detecting the end of the input, causing a second adjustment to the value of the parameter associated with the control element, wherein the second adjustment is based on the detected movement component.

169. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an input directed to a control element of a user interface, wherein the input includes a detected movement component; in response to detecting the input directed to the control element, causing a first adjustment to a value of a parameter associated with the control element, wherein the first adjustment is based on the detected movement component; detecting an end of the input; and after detecting the end of the input, causing a second adjustment to the value of the parameter associated with the control element, wherein the second adjustment is based on the detected movement component.

170. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a plurality of input devices that includes at least a first hardware input device and a second hardware input device different from the first hardware input device: 1615614854 448Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a user interface; while displaying the user interface, detecting, via one or more of the plurality of input devices, a set of one or more inputs; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the user interface with one or more deformations, wherein displaying the user interface with the one or more deformations includes: in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs includes a first press input directed to the first hardware input device, displaying the user interface with a first deformation at a first region, wherein the first region corresponds to a location of the first hardware input device; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs includes a second press input directed to the second hardware input device, displaying the user interface with a second deformation at a second region, different from the first region, wherein the second region corresponds to a location of the second hardware input device.

171. The method of claim 170, wherein: displaying the user interface with the first deformation at the first region includes bending a portion of an edge of the user interface within the first region.

172. The method of any one of claims 170-171, wherein: displaying the user interface with the first deformation at the first region includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a graphical element of a solid color replacing a respective portion of the user interface within the first region.

173. The method of any one of claims 170-172, wherein: displaying the user interface with the first deformation at the first region includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a graphical element of a respective color replacing a respective portion of the user interface within the first region, wherein the respective color represents a color of a portion of a hardware component of the computer system located near the first region. 1615614854 449Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 174. The method of claim 173, wherein the portion of a hardware component of the computer system located near the first region includes a portion of at least one of the one or more display generation components.

175. The method of any one of claims 170-174, further comprising: while displaying the user interface with the first deformation at the first region, detecting an end of the first press input directed to the first hardware input device; and in response to detecting the end of the first press input directed to the first hardware input device, reducing a magnitude of the first deformation.

176. The method of claim 175, wherein reducing the magnitude of the first deformation includes gradually changing an appearance of the first deformation.

177. The method of any one of claims 170-176, further comprising: while displaying the user interface with the one or more deformations, changing a magnitude of a respective deformation of the one or more deformations.

178. The method of claim 177, wherein changing the magnitude of the respective deformation of the one or more deformations includes: while detecting the first press input directed to the first hardware input device, changing the magnitude of the first deformation at the first region based on a current duration of the first press input.

179. The method of any one of claims 177-178, wherein changing the magnitude of the respective deformation of the one or more deformations includes: while detecting the first press input directed to the first hardware input device, detecting a change in an intensity of the first press input; and in response to detecting the change in the intensity of the first press input, changing the magnitude of the first deformation at the first region based on the change in the intensity of the first press input.

180. The method of any one of claims 170-179, further comprising: while displaying the user interface with the one or more deformations, detecting an end of the set of one or more inputs; 1615614854 450Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in response to detecting the end of the set of one or more inputs, displaying the user interface without the one or more deformations; while displaying the user interface without the one or more deformations, detecting, via one or more of the plurality of input devices, a second set of one or more inputs; and in response to detecting the second set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the user interface with one or more additional deformations, wherein displaying the user interface with the one or more additional deformations includes: in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs includes a first additional press input directed to the first hardware input device, displaying the user interface with a first additional deformation at the first region; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs includes a second additional press input directed to the second hardware input device, displaying the user interface with a second additional deformation at the second region.

181. The method of any one of claims 170-180, wherein: the user interface includes a set of one or more user interface elements including a first user interface element displayed at the first region; and displaying the user interface with the first deformation at the first region includes changing a location of the first user interface element.

182. The method of claim 181, wherein the first user interface element includes a visual representation of a custom operation associated with the first hardware input device.

183. The method of any one of claims 181-182, wherein the first user interface element includes a volume indicator element.

184. The method of any one of claims 181-183, further comprising: receiving a request to perform a secure operation; and in response to receiving the request to perform the secure operation, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element, wherein the first user interface element includes a confirmation element for the secure operation. 1615614854 451Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 185. The method of any one of claims 170-184, wherein displaying the user interface with the one or more deformations includes: in accordance with a determination that the first press input directed to the first hardware input device and the second press input directed to the second hardware input device are concurrently detected, displaying the user interface with both the first deformation at the first region and the second deformation at the second region.

186. The method of any one of claims 170-185, further comprising: while displaying the user interface with the first deformation at the first region: in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs does not include a respective press input directed to the second hardware input device, foregoing displaying the user interface with a respective deformation at the second region.

187. The method of claim 186, further comprising: while displaying the user interface with the second deformation at the second region: in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs does not include a respective press input directed to the first hardware input device, foregoing displaying the user interface with a respective deformation at the first region.

188. The method of any one of claims 170-187, wherein the plurality of input devices includes a customizable hardware input device, further comprising: in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that set of one or more inputs includes a respective press input directed to the customizable hardware input device, displaying the user interface with a respective deformation at a respective region, wherein the respective region corresponds to a location of the customizable hardware input device; and in accordance with a determination that the respective press input directed to the customizable hardware input device satisfies a set of action criteria, initiating a process for performing a custom operation associated with the customizable hardware input device.

189. The method of any one of claims 170-188, wherein the plurality of input devices includes one or more hardware volume control devices, further comprising: in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs: 1615614854 452Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in accordance with a determination that set of one or more inputs includes a respective press input directed to the one or more hardware volume control devices, displaying the user interface with a respective deformation at a respective region, wherein the respective region corresponds to a location of the one or more volume control devices; in accordance with a determination that the respective press input directed to the one or more hardware volume control devices satisfies a set of volume increase criteria, increasing a volume setting for an audio output; and in accordance with a determination that the respective press input directed to the one or more hardware volume control devices satisfies a set of volume decrease criteria, decreasing a volume setting for the audio output.

190. The method of any one of claims 170-189, wherein the plurality of input devices includes a hardware power control device, further comprising: in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that set of one or more inputs includes a respective press input directed to the hardware power control device, displaying the user interface with a respective deformation at a respective region, wherein the respective region corresponds to a location of the hardware power control device; and in accordance with a determination that the respective press input directed to the hardware power control device satisfies a set of power criteria, initiating a process for changing a power state of the computer system.

191. The method of any one of claims 170-190, wherein the plurality of input devices includes a hardware input device associated with a digital assistant system, further comprising: in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that set of one or more inputs includes a respective press input directed to the hardware input device associated with the digital assistant system, displaying the user interface with a respective deformation at a respective region, wherein the respective region corresponds to a location of the hardware input device associated with the digital assistant system; and in accordance with a determination that the respective press input directed to the hardware input device associated with the digital assistant system satisfies a set of digital assistant criteria, initiating a digital assistant session using the digital assistant system. 1615614854 453Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 192. The method of any one of claims 170-191, further comprising: while displaying the user interface with the one or more deformations, capturing a screenshot of the user interface, wherein the screenshot of the user interface does not include the one or more deformations.

193. The method of any one of claims 170-192, wherein the plurality of input devices includes a hardware input device associated with a media capture user interface, further comprising: in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that set of one or more inputs includes a respective press input directed to the hardware input device associated with the media capture user interface, displaying the user interface with a respective deformation at a respective region, wherein the respective region corresponds to a location of the hardware input device associated with the media capture user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the respective press input directed to the hardware input device associated with the media capture user interface satisfies a set of media capture criteria, initiating a process for performing a media capture operation.

194. The method of any one of claims 170-193, wherein displaying the user interface with the one or more deformations includes: displaying the user interface with a respective deformation at a respective region; and in accordance with a determination that a visual characteristic of a portion of the user interface corresponding to the respective region satisfies a set of one or more appearance criteria, displaying at least a respective portion of a border of the respective deformation with a first appearance; and in accordance with a determination that the visual characteristic of a portion of the user interface corresponding to the respective region does not satisfy set of one or more appearance criteria, foregoing displaying the respective portion of the border of the respective deformation with the first appearance.

195. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a plurality of input 1615614854 454Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 devices that includes at least a first hardware input device and a second hardware input device different from the first hardware input device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 170-194.

196. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and a plurality of input devices that includes at least a first hardware input device and a second hardware input device different from the first hardware input device, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 170-194.

197. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and a plurality of input devices that includes at least a first hardware input device and a second hardware input device different from the first hardware input device, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 170-194.

198. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a plurality of input devices that includes at least a first hardware input device and a second hardware input device different from the first hardware input device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 170-194.

199. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a plurality of input devices that includes at least a first hardware input device and a second hardware input device different from the first hardware input device, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a user interface; 1615614854 455Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 while displaying the user interface, detecting, via one or more of the plurality of input devices, a set of one or more inputs; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the user interface with one or more deformations, wherein displaying the user interface with the one or more deformations includes: in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs includes a first press input directed to the first hardware input device, displaying the user interface with a first deformation at a first region, wherein the first region corresponds to a location of the first hardware input device; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs includes a second press input directed to the second hardware input device, displaying the user interface with a second deformation at a second region, different from the first region, wherein the second region corresponds to a location of the second hardware input device.

200. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and a plurality of input devices that includes at least a first hardware input device and a second hardware input device different from the first hardware input device, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a user interface; while displaying the user interface, detecting, via one or more of the plurality of input devices, a set of one or more inputs; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the user interface with one or more deformations, wherein displaying the user interface with the one or more deformations includes: in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs includes a first press input directed to the first hardware input device, displaying the user interface with a first deformation at a first region, wherein the first region corresponds to a location of the first hardware input device; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs includes a second press input directed to the second hardware input device, displaying the 1615614854 456Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 user interface with a second deformation at a second region, different from the first region, wherein the second region corresponds to a location of the second hardware input device.

201. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and a plurality of input devices that includes at least a first hardware input device and a second hardware input device different from the first hardware input device, comprising: means for displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a user interface; means for, while displaying the user interface, detecting, via one or more of the plurality of input devices, a set of one or more inputs; and means for, in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the user interface with one or more deformations, wherein displaying the user interface with the one or more deformations includes: in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs includes a first press input directed to the first hardware input device, displaying the user interface with a first deformation at a first region, wherein the first region corresponds to a location of the first hardware input device; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs includes a second press input directed to the second hardware input device, displaying the user interface with a second deformation at a second region, different from the first region, wherein the second region corresponds to a location of the second hardware input device.

202. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and a plurality of input devices that includes at least a first hardware input device and a second hardware input device different from the first hardware input device, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a user interface; while displaying the user interface, detecting, via one or more of the plurality of input devices, a set of one or more inputs; and 1615614854 457Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the user interface with one or more deformations, wherein displaying the user interface with the one or more deformations includes: in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs includes a first press input directed to the first hardware input device, displaying the user interface with a first deformation at a first region, wherein the first region corresponds to a location of the first hardware input device; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more inputs includes a second press input directed to the second hardware input device, displaying the user interface with a second deformation at a second region, different from the first region, wherein the second region corresponds to a location of the second hardware input device.

203. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, a plurality of cameras including a first camera and a second camera that is different from the first camera, and one or more input devices including a first hardware input device: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera, detecting, via the first hardware input device, a first movement input; and in response to detecting the first movement input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera without displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera.

204. The method of claim 203, wherein the plurality of cameras include at least one camera that is housed facing a first direction and at least one camera that is housed facing a second direction, different from the first direction.

205. The method of any one of claims 203-204, wherein the plurality of cameras includes at least one camera that is housed facing a respective direction and at least one camera that is housed facing the respective direction. 1615614854 458Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 206. The method of any one of claims 203-205, further comprising: in response to detecting the first movement input: in accordance with a determination that a first set of criteria is satisfied, displaying a first transition animation between the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera and the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera , wherein the first set of criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the first camera is housed facing a first direction and the second camera is housed facing a second direction that is different from the first direction ; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of criteria is not satisfied, displaying a second transition animation between the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera and the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera, wherein the second transition animation is different from the first transition animation.

207. The method of any one of claims 203-206, further comprising: while displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera, detecting, via the first hardware input device, a second movement input, wherein the second movement input moves in a same direction as the first movement input; and in response to detecting the second movement input, displaying a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using a third camera of the plurality of cameras without displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera, wherein the third camera is different from the first camera and different from the second camera.

208. The method of claim 207, wherein the first camera, the second camera, and the third camera are housed facing a same direction.

209. The method of claim 207, wherein the third camera is housed facing a first direction and at least one of the first camera and the second camera is housed facing a second direction, different from the first direction. 1615614854 459Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 210. The method of any one of claims 203-209, further comprising: while displaying the camera user interface for capturing media using the second camera of the plurality of cameras, detecting, via the first hardware input device, a third movement input; and 211. The method of any one of claims 203-210, further comprising: while displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera, detecting, via the first hardware input device, an end of the first movement input; and in response to detecting the end of the first movement input: in accordance with a determination that the end of the first movement input satisfies a set of one or more movement criteria, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using a fourth camera that is different from the second camera without displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera; and in accordance with a determination that the end of the first movement input does not satisfy the set of one or more movement criteria, maintaining displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera.

212. The method of any one of claims 203-211, further comprising: while displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera, detecting, via the first hardware input device, a fourth movement input, wherein the fourth movement input moves in a different direction than the first movement input; and in response to detecting the fourth movement input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera without displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera. 1615614854 460Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 213. The method of any one of claims 203-212, further comprising: while displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera, detecting, via the first hardware input device, a fifth movement input, wherein the fifth movement input moves in a different direction than the first movement input; and in response to detecting the fourth movement input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using a fifth camera without displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera.

214. The method of any one of claims 203-213, wherein the first camera includes a first fixed-focal length lens and the second camera includes a second fixed-focal length lens, different from the first fixed-focal length lens.

215. The method of any one of claims 203-214, wherein the plurality of cameras provides a first plurality of zoom levels for capturing media, and further comprising: detecting, via the one or more input devices an input including a request to associate a zoom option with the first hardware input device; while displaying a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using a respective camera of the plurality of cameras, detecting, via the first hardware input device, a respective movement input; and in response to detecting the respective movement input: in accordance with a determination that the zoom option is associated with the first hardware input device when the respective movement input is detected, changing a zoom level for capturing media to a respective zoom level selected from a second plurality of zoom levels, wherein the second plurality of zoom levels includes more zoom levels than the first plurality of zoom levels.

216. The method of any one of claims 203-215, further comprising: detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input including a request to associate a zoom option with the first hardware input device; while displaying a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using a respective camera of the plurality of cameras, detecting, via the first hardware input device, a respective movement input; and in response to detecting the respective movement input: 1615614854 461Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in accordance with a determination that the zoom option is associated with the first hardware input device when the respective movement input is detected, changing a zoom level for capturing media to a respective zoom level, wherein changing the zoom level for capturing media to the respective zoom level includes: in accordance with a determination that the respective movement input is detected while displaying a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using a sixth camera of the plurality of cameras, wherein the sixth camera of the plurality of cameras is housed facing a first direction, selecting the respective zoom level from a third plurality of zoom levels; and in accordance with a determination that the respective movement input is detected while displaying a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using a seventh camera of the plurality of cameras, wherein the seventh camera is housed facing a second direction, selecting the respective zoom level from a fourth plurality of zoom levels, wherein the fourth plurality of zoom levels includes a plurality of zoom levels between a zoom level associated with the seventh camera and a zoom level associated with another camera of the plurality of cameras .

217. The method of any one of claims 203-216, further comprising: detecting, via the first hardware input device, a press input; and in response to detecting the press input, performing a media capture operation, wherein performing the media capture operation includes: in accordance with a determination that the press input is detected while displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera, capturing media primarily using the first camera; and in accordance with a determination that the press input is detected while displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera, capturing media primarily using the second camera.

218. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, a plurality of cameras including a first camera and a second camera that is different from the first camera, and one or more input devices including a first hardware input device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 203-217. 1615614854 462Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 219. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, a plurality of cameras including a first camera and a second camera that is different from the first camera, and one or more input devices including a first hardware input device, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 203-217.

220. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, a plurality of cameras including a first camera and a second camera that is different from the first camera, and one or more input devices including a first hardware input device, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 203-217.

221. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, a plurality of cameras including a first camera and a second camera that is different from the first camera, and one or more input devices including a first hardware input device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 203-217.

222. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, a plurality of cameras including a first camera and a second camera that is different from the first camera, and one or more input devices including a first hardware input device, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera, detecting, via the first hardware input device, a first movement input; and in response to detecting the first movement input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface for capturing media primarily 1615614854 463Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 using the second camera without displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera.

223. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, a plurality of cameras including a first camera and a second camera that is different from the first camera, and one or more input devices including a first hardware input device, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera, detecting, via the first hardware input device, a first movement input; and in response to detecting the first movement input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera without displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera.

224. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, a plurality of cameras including a first camera and a second camera that is different from the first camera, and one or more input devices including a first hardware input device, comprising: means for, while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera, detecting, via the first hardware input device, a first movement input; and means for, in response to detecting the first movement input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera without displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera.

225. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, a plurality of cameras including a first camera and a 1615614854 464Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 second camera that is different from the first camera, and one or more input devices including a first hardware input device, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera, detecting, via the first hardware input device, a first movement input; and in response to detecting the first movement input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the second camera without displaying the camera user interface for capturing media primarily using the first camera.

226. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, a one or more cameras, and one or more input devices including a hardware input device: detecting, via the hardware input device, a press input; and in response to detecting the press input: in accordance with a determination that the press input satisfies a first set of one or more criteria, performing a first operation, wherein performing the first operation includes: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a viewfinder user interface including a representation of a field-of-view of the one or more cameras; displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, wherein displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes a first type of content, displaying, in the viewfinder user interface, a first indication associated with the first type of content; and in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes a second type of content that is different from the first type of content, displaying, in the viewfinder user 1615614854 465Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 interface, a second indication associated with the second type of content that is different from the first indication.

227. The method of claim 226, wherein the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes one or more selectable user interface objects, and further comprising: in response to detecting an input selecting a respective selectable user interface object, performing a respective operation based on the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

228. The method of any one of claims 226-227, further comprising: while displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, detecting a change to the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras; and in response to detecting the change to the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, updating the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, wherein updating the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes the first type of content, displaying, in the viewfinder user interface, a third indication associated with the first type of content; and in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes the second type of content, displaying, in the viewfinder user interface, a fourth indication associated with the second type of content.

229. The method of claim 228, wherein updating the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes maintaining display of at least one indication of the one or more indications.

230. The method of any one of claims 226-229, wherein: a first portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes the first type of content; and displaying the first indication associated with the first type of content includes: 1615614854 466Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in accordance with a determination that the first type of content is included a second portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, different from the first portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, includes the first type of content , displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an additional indication associated with the first type of content concurrently with the first indication associated with the first type of content.

231. The method of claim 230, wherein displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes the first type of content and the second type of content, concurrently displaying the first indication and the second indication.

232. The method of any one of claims 226-231, further comprising: while displaying the viewfinder user interface in a first state, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first user input, wherein displaying the viewfinder user interface in the first state includes updating, based on current camera data received from the one or more cameras, the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras; and in response to detecting the first user input: in accordance with a determination that the first user input satisfies a second set of one or more criteria, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the viewfinder user interface in a second state, wherein displaying the viewfinder user interface in the second state includes foregoing updating the representation of the field-of- view of the one or more cameras.

233. The method of claim 232, wherein displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: while displaying the viewfinder user interface in the first state, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras within a first region; and while displaying the viewfinder user interface in the second state, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a respective indication of the one or more indications at a respective location of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras outside of the first region. 1615614854 467Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 234. The method of any one of claims 232-233, wherein displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: while displaying the viewfinder user interface in the first state, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a respective indication of the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras at a first size and including a first amount of information; and while displaying the viewfinder user interface in the second state, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the respective indication at a second size that is different from the first size and including a second amount of information that is different from the first amount of information.

235. The method of any one of claims 232-234, wherein displaying the viewfinder user interface in the second state includes: in response to detecting the first user input, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an animation overlaying the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

236. The method of claim 235, further comprising: while displaying the viewfinder user interface in the first state, displaying a respective selectable user interface object that, when selected, causes the computer system to display the viewfinder user interface in the second state, wherein: the respective selectable user interface object is displayed with a set of one or more colors; and the animation overlaying the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes the set of one or more colors.

237. The method of any one of claims 235-236, wherein displaying the animation overlaying the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first animation at a first portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras that includes a respective type of content of a set of one or more types of content; and 1615614854 468Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second animation at a second portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras that does not include the respective type of content of the set of one or more types of content, wherein the first animation is a different type of animation than the second animation.

238. The method of any one of claims 232-237, further comprising: while displaying the viewfinder user interface in the second state, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second user input; and in response to detecting the second user input: in accordance with a determination that the second user input satisfies a third set of one or more criteria, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the viewfinder user interface in the first state, wherein displaying the viewfinder user interface in the first state includes updating, based on the current camera data received from the one or more cameras, the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

239. The method of claim 238, wherein: the second set of one or more criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the first user input is directed to a respective selectable user interface object while displaying the viewfinder user interface in the first state; and the third set of one or more criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the second user input is directed to the respective selectable user interface object while displaying the viewfinder user interface in the second state.

240. The method of any one of claims 226-239, wherein displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a respective indication associated with content included in a respective portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, wherein the respective indication is displayed with an appearance based on a spatial arrangement of the content included in the respective portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras. 1615614854 469Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 241. The method of any one of claims 226-240, further comprising: while displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input directed to a respective indication of the one or more indications, wherein the respective indication is associated with a respective portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras; and in response to detecting the input directed to the respective indication of the one or more indications, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an expanded indication, different from the respective indication, associated with the respective portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

242. The method of claim 241, wherein: the respective indication of the one or more indications provides a first set of information; and the expanded indication provides a second set of information that includes a greater amount of information than the first set of information.

243. The method of any one of claims 241-242, further comprising: in response to detecting the input directed to the respective indication of the one or more indications: in accordance with a determination that the respective portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes a third type of content, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a respective selectable user interface object for performing a respective action.

244. The method of any one of claims 241-243, wherein the expanded indication associated with the respective portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras overlays at least a first portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

245. The method of claim 244, wherein the expanded indication associated with the respective portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras does not overlay at least a second portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, the method further comprising: 1615614854 470Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 while displaying the expanded indication associated with the respective portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a respective user input directed to the second portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras; and in response to detecting the respective user input directed to the second portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, ceasing displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the expanded indication associated with the respective portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

246. The method of any one of claims 226-245, further comprising: while displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input directed to a fifth indication of the one or more indications; and in response to detecting the input directed to the fifth indication of the one or more indications: obtaining, from an external computer system, a result of a remote process, wherein the result of the remote process is based on the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras; and providing an output based on the result of the remote process.

247. The method of claim 246, further comprising: while displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input directed to a sixth indication of the one or more indications; and in response to detecting the input: in accordance with a determination that a set of criteria is satisfied, displaying the fifth indication.

248. The method of any one of claims 246-247, further comprising: while displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input directed to a seventh indication of the one or more indications; and in response to detecting the input directed to the seventh indication of the one or more indications: 1615614854 471Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 obtaining a result of a second process that is different from the remote process, wherein the result of the second process is based on the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras; and providing an output based on the result of the second process.

249. The method of any one of claims 246-248, wherein displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes the first type of content, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the fifth indication concurrently with the first indication associated with the first type of content; and in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes the second type of content, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the fifth indication concurrently with the second indication associated with the second type of content.

250. The method of any one of claims 246-249, wherein obtaining the result of the remote process includes: in accordance with a determination that a first set of content criteria is satisfied, obtaining, from the external computer system, a first result of the remote process based on a first portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras , wherein the first set of content criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the input directed to the fifth indication of the one or more indications was detected while displaying a selection indication visually emphasizing the first portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras .

251. The method of claim 250, wherein obtaining the result of the remote process includes: in accordance with a determination that a second set of content criteria is satisfied, obtaining, from the external computer system, a second result of the remote process based on a second portion, different from the first portion, of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras , wherein the second set of content criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the input directed to the fifth indication of the one or more indications was 1615614854 472Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 detected while displaying the selection indication visually emphasizing the second portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras .

252. The method of any one of claims 250-251, wherein obtaining the result of the remote process includes: in accordance with a determination that the input directed to the fifth indication of the one or more indications was detected while the selection indication was not displayed , obtaining, from the external computer system, a third result of the remote process based on a third portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, wherein the third portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes the first portion and the second portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

253. The method of any one of claims 246-252, wherein providing the output based on the result of the remote process includes: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a user interface element including information based on the result of the remote process, wherein the user interface element overlays a respective portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras .

254. The method of claim 253, further comprising: while displaying the user interface element including the information based on the result of the remote process, detecting, via the one or more display generation components, a respective user input directed to a location of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras outside of the respective portion; and in response to detecting the respective user input directed to the location of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras outside of the respective portion, ceasing displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the user interface element including the information based on the result of the remote process.

255. The method of any one of claims 226-254, further comprising: in response to detecting the press input: 1615614854 473Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in accordance with a determination that the press input satisfies a fourth set of one or more criteria, performing a second operation that is different from the first operation, wherein: the first set of one or more criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the press input includes a press of a first type; and the fourth set of one or more criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the press input includes a press of a second type that is different from the first type.

256. The method of claim 255, wherein performing the second operation includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media capture user interface.

257. The method of any one of claims 255-256, wherein performing the second operation includes capturing, using the one or more cameras, a first media item.

258. The method of any one of claims 255-257, further comprising: in response to detecting the press input: in accordance with a determination that the press input satisfies a fifth set of one or more criteria, performing a third operation that is different from the first operation and different from the second operation, wherein the fifth set of one or more criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the press input includes a press of a third type that is different from the first type and different from the second type.

259. The method of claim 258, wherein performing the third operation includes initiating an action selecting an operation from a plurality of candidate operations to associate with the hardware input device.

260. The method of any one of claims 255-259, further comprising: while displaying the viewfinder user interface including the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, detecting, via the hardware input device, a second press input; and in response to detecting the second press input: 1615614854 474Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in accordance with a determination that the press input satisfies the fourth set of one or more criteria, performing the second operation that is different from the first operation.

261. The method of any one of claims 226-260, further comprising: while displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras including a respective indication, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input selecting the respective indication; and in response to detecting the input selecting the respective indication, initiating a process for sharing respective information associated with at least a portion of the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

262. The method of claim 261, wherein displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: in accordance with a determination that the viewfinder user interface is displayed in a respective state, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the respective indication, wherein displaying the viewfinder user interface in the respective state includes foregoing updating the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

263. The method of any one of claims 226-262, wherein displaying the viewfinder user interface including the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: in accordance with a determination that a first set of the one or more cameras is selected, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a field-of-view of the first set of the one or more cameras; and in accordance with a determination that a second set of the one or more cameras, different from the first set of the one or more cameras, is selected, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a field-of-view of the second set of the one or more cameras; and the method further comprising: while displaying the viewfinder user interface including the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a respective selectable user interface object; 1615614854 475Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 detecting, via the one or more input devices, a respective user input directed to the respective selectable user interface object; and in response to detecting the respective user input directed to the respective selectable user interface object, selecting a respective set of the one or more cameras.

264. The method of any one of claims 226-263, wherein the first type of content and the second type of content are included in a set of recognized content types, wherein the set of recognized content types comprises one or more of the following content types: animal types, plant types, text types, symbol types, and contact information types.

265. The method of any one of claims 226-264, further comprising: while displaying the viewfinder user interface including the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, foregoing capturing media using the one or more cameras.

266. The method of claim 265, further comprising: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a respective user input of a respective input type; and in response to detecting the respective user input of the respective input type: in accordance with a determination that the respective user input of the respective input type is detected while displaying the viewfinder user interface including the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, performing a fourth operation; and in accordance with a determination that the respective user input of the respective input type is detected while displaying a media capture user interface that is different from the viewfinder user interface, performing a fifth operation that is different from the fourth operation.

267. The method of any one of claims 226-266, wherein the computer system is further in communication with one or more audio sensor devices, further comprising: detecting, via the one or more audio sensor devices, a speech input; and in response to detecting the speech input: in accordance with a determination that the speech input satisfies a set of speech input criteria, providing an output including information associated with the field-of- 1615614854 476Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 view of the one or more cameras, wherein the set of speech input criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the speech input includes a request associated with the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

268. The method of claim 267, wherein the set of speech input criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the speech input is detected while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the viewfinder user interface including the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

269. The method of any one of claims 267-268, wherein the set of speech input criteria includes a criterion that is satisfied when the speech input is detected after detecting a selection of a respective option for the viewfinder user interface including the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras.

270. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, a one or more cameras, and one or more input devices including a hardware input device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 226-269.

271. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, a one or more cameras, and one or more input devices including a hardware input device, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 226-269.

272. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, a one or more cameras, and one or more input devices including a hardware input device, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 226-269. 1615614854 477Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 273. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, a one or more cameras, and one or more input devices including a hardware input device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 226-269.

274. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, a one or more cameras, and one or more input devices including a hardware input device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the hardware input device, a press input; and in response to detecting the press input: in accordance with a determination that the press input satisfies a first set of one or more criteria, performing a first operation, wherein performing the first operation includes: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a viewfinder user interface including a representation of a field-of-view of the one or more cameras; displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, wherein displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes a first type of content, displaying, in the viewfinder user interface, a first indication associated with the first type of content; and in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes a second type of content that is different from the first type of content, displaying, in the viewfinder user interface, a second indication associated with the second type of content that is different from the first indication.

275. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, a one or more cameras, and one or more input devices including a hardware input device, comprising: 1615614854 478Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the hardware input device, a press input; and in response to detecting the press input: in accordance with a determination that the press input satisfies a first set of one or more criteria, performing a first operation, wherein performing the first operation includes: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a viewfinder user interface including a representation of a field-of-view of the one or more cameras; displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, wherein displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes a first type of content, displaying, in the viewfinder user interface, a first indication associated with the first type of content; and in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes a second type of content that is different from the first type of content, displaying, in the viewfinder user interface, a second indication associated with the second type of content that is different from the first indication.

276. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components, a one or more cameras, and one or more input devices including a hardware input device, comprising: means for detecting, via the hardware input device, a press input; and means for, in response to detecting the press input: in accordance with a determination that the press input satisfies a first set of one or more criteria, performing a first operation, wherein performing the first operation includes: 1615614854 479Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a viewfinder user interface including a representation of a field-of-view of the one or more cameras; displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, wherein displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes a first type of content, displaying, in the viewfinder user interface, a first indication associated with the first type of content; and in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes a second type of content that is different from the first type of content, displaying, in the viewfinder user interface, a second indication associated with the second type of content that is different from the first indication.

277. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components, a one or more cameras, and one or more input devices including a hardware input device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the hardware input device, a press input; and in response to detecting the press input: in accordance with a determination that the press input satisfies a first set of one or more criteria, performing a first operation, wherein performing the first operation includes: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a viewfinder user interface including a representation of a field-of-view of the one or more cameras; displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras, wherein displaying the one or more indications associated with the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes: 1615614854 480Attorney Docket No.: P65321WO1 / 77770000-786501 in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes a first type of content, displaying, in the viewfinder user interface, a first indication associated with the first type of content; and in accordance with a determination that the representation of the field-of-view of the one or more cameras includes a second type of content that is different from the first type of content, displaying, in the viewfinder user interface, a second indication associated with the second type of content that is different from the first indication. 1615614854 481

Images